JP2020018435A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing an attention degree of a player to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: electrically-driven accessories 37a1, 37a2 having an open state in which a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held and the game balls enter a right operating port 37B and a closed state in which the game balls flowing down the game area do not enter the right operating port 37; and electrically-driven accessory drive units 37b1, 37b2 that set a state to the open state or the closed state by driving the electrically-driven accessories 37a1, 37a2. After setting the electrically-driven accessories 37a1, 37a2 to the open state, the electrically-driven accessory drive units 37b1, 37b2 set the electrically-driven accessories 37a1, 37a2 to the closed state on the basis of entry of the game ball in the right operating port 37B, thereby releasing the remaining game balls held in the electrically-driven accessories 37a1, 37a2. The machine includes holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of holding the game balls by the electrically-driven accessories 37a1, 37a2.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 38

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of a game board is provided, and when the game ball enters a working opening (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine to execute is known (for example, see Patent Document 1). When the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, for example, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, for example, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

JP 2005-074175 A

  However, since the variable prize device pays out predetermined game balls when entering the game balls flowing down the game area, the payout of the game balls becomes monotonous, and thus the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's attention to a game.

  The gaming machine of the present invention has a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery upon entry of the game ball. A lottery means to execute, based on the result of the internal lottery executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the lottery means, game state transition means to transition the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player, A variable prize device that shifts to a state in which game balls can enter when transitioning to the specific control state, wherein the lottery means can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, A guide piece having an open state in which the ball enters the means, and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter the lottery means, and a guide for setting the open state or the closed state by driving the guide piece A variable winning device, comprising: a driving unit; a variable winning device that pays out a predetermined game ball when entering the game ball; an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game region enters the large winning opening; and a game region. A closed state that does not allow game balls flowing down the ball to enter, and an open / close door located downstream of the flow path of the game ball that has passed the guide piece, and set to an open state or a closed state by driving the open / close door And a variable winning drive unit that sets the guide piece to an open state and then sets the guide piece to a closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the guide piece, The gaming machine includes a holding amount adjusting unit that adjusts an amount of the game ball held by the guide piece.

  According to the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. Front view of gaming board Front view of a gaming board with the right operating port and the vicinity of the variable winning device enlarged. Figure showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery The figure which shows the success / failure table which memorized the value of the random number which wins the big hit occurrence The figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number regarding the distribution destination of a big hit type The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing The figure which shows the flowchart of a winning process for an operating port The figure which shows the flowchart of normal processing The figure which shows the flowchart of a main process The figure which shows the flowchart of game time control processing The figure which shows the flowchart of a data setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of a fluctuation start process The figure which shows the flowchart of a setting process of a display continuation time. The figure which shows the flowchart of a game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of a special winning opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of a special winning opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the time of completion | finish of opening / closing execution mode FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed by a sound light emission control apparatus. The figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process Diagram showing the relationship between game results and game state A diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device in a case where the result of the success or failure is “special loss result” after shifting to the high probability mode. Front view of a game board in which the vicinity of a right operating port and a variable winning device according to a second embodiment of the present invention are enlarged. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of a winning process for an operating port The figure which shows the flowchart of normal processing The figure which shows the flowchart of a game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed by a sound light emission control apparatus. The figure which shows the flowchart of game ball counting processing The figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process The figure which shows the flowchart of the effect determination processing at the time of closure After shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls travel on the board of the electric accessory, and the result is a "special off result", and the waiting time (standby period) for starting small hits is " A figure showing the right operating port, variable winning device, and symbol display device when "50" is set. After shifting to the high-probability mode, two game balls travel on the board of the electric accessory, and the result is a "special off result", and the waiting time (standby period) for starting the small hit is A figure showing the right operating port, variable winning device, and symbol display device when "50" is set. After shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls travel on the board of the electric accessory, and the result is a "special off result", and the waiting time (standby period) for starting small hits is " Figure showing the right operating port, variable winning device, and symbol display device when "200" is set Front view of a game board in which the vicinity of a right operating port and a variable winning device according to a third embodiment of the present invention are enlarged. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine The figure which shows the flowchart of a winning process for an operating port The figure which shows the flowchart of normal processing The figure which shows the flowchart of a process for electric role support A diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when the winning / failing result becomes “special loss result” after being shifted to the high probability mode and the upper electric auditors lottery is won. A diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device in a case where the winning / failing result is “special off result” after shifting to the high probability mode and the upper electric auditors lottery is not won. Front view of a game board in which the vicinity of a right operating port and a variable winning device according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention are enlarged. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. A diagram showing the right operating port, variable winning device, and symbol display device when the winning or losing result is “special loss result” after the transition to the high probability mode and the game ball wins the large winning opening. A diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device in a case where the winning / failing result is “special loss result” after shifting to the high probability mode and the gaming ball does not win the large winning opening. The front view of the game board which expanded the vicinity of the right operating port and the variable winning device according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device in a case where the result of the success or failure is “special loss result” after shifting to the high probability mode.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that is a kind of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward (front side). 12 is provided.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions as a support side, and is disposed in front of the inner frame. The front door frame 13 is supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the portions as a support side, and is disposed at the rear of the inner frame, and one of the left and right side portions is defined as a support side and And a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

  Note that the gaming machine body 12 includes a locking device (not shown) provided at the tip end of the rotation. This locking device has a function of setting the gaming machine main body 12 to a locked state in which it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and a function of setting the front door frame 13 to be in a locked state with which the inner frame cannot be opened. Have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is formed of glass to be colorless and transparent, but may be formed of synthetic resin and the like to be colorless and transparent.
The front door frame 13 includes a display lamp unit 23 provided above the window 21 as a part of a light emitting unit including various lamp units provided around the window unit 21, and a display lamp unit. 23, a speaker section 24 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to a game situation, and an upper bulging section 25 and a lower bulging section 26 provided below the window 21. I have.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are vertically arranged side by side, and are provided so as to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided on the inside so as to open upward, and a push button 25b provided at the center of the upper plate 25a. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 5) provided in the back pack unit, and moves the ball toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 5) while aligning the balls in a line. Has a function to guide. The push button 25b functions as an operating unit that executes an expected effect that, when operated by the player, causes the player to expect the game state to be shifted to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player.
The lower swelling portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided on the inside so as to open upward. The lower plate 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 25a.

  Further, the front door frame 13 is provided with a firing handle 27 as firing means provided to the right of the lower plate 26a. The firing handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to fire a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. I do. The firing handle 27 changes the firing strength of a game ball that fires toward the game area, that is, the momentum of firing, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
The game board 31, as shown in FIG. 2, has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The above-mentioned game area is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. In the game area, almost the entire area can be visually recognized from the front via the window 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for a game ball to a game area, and the guide rail 34 is fired from a game ball firing mechanism 81 by a player rotating the firing handle 27. The guided game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area.

  The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is disposed on one side of the game area and faces the upper center of the game area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27 by the player increases. It shifts to the side. In the present embodiment, the exit of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

  The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 has a general winning opening 35 provided in each opening, a central working opening (first starting entering ball portion) 36, a right operating opening (second starting entering ball portion) 37, a variable winning device 38, And an outlet 39. Further, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the central left side and the central right side, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, and a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion. Have. Furthermore, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 and various members (accessories) such as windmills, which are implanted for appropriately dispersing or adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, in the game area. ing.

  Each of the general winning opening 35, the central operating opening 36, the right operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 includes detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of game balls. Are provided on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 includes a detection sensor 40a, the central operating opening 36 includes a detection sensor 40b, the right operating opening 37 includes a detection sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 includes a detection sensor 40d. It has. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be of any type as long as they can individually detect a winning of a game ball. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 executes payout of ten prize balls when a ball enters the general winning opening 35. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the central operating port 36 and when a ball enters the right operating port 37. The pachinko machine 10 executes payout of 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize device 38. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

  The out port 39 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area of the game board 31. Game balls that have not entered the various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 39. Further, the out port 39 includes a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40e is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the out port 39, unlike when a ball enters any of the winning ports.

  Each through gate 41 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40f is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters each through gate 41, unlike when a ball enters any of various winning ports.

  Here, the entering ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. This also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area continues without flowing. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish a game ball from entering the out port 39, entering a game ball into various winning ports is also referred to as winning. Also, entering a ball into the through gate 41 means continuing flowing down the game area without passing through the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. The entry into the through gate 41 is also referred to as a prize, as is the entry into various prize openings.

  The central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37 are unitized as operating port devices and installed on the game board 31. The central operating port 36 is provided so as to open upward so that game balls flowing down the game area can enter. The right operating port 37 is provided so as to open rightward so that game balls flowing down the game area cannot enter.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operating port and the variable winning device are enlarged.
As shown in FIG. 3, the right operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37 a as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a substantially flat movable piece having a vertically upper plate surface formed in a wavy shape. ing.
In addition, the player strikes the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 as the maximum, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit portion is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the right operating port 37 avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

  The electric accessory 37a is provided to be inclined so as to descend toward the right operation port 37, and is connected to an electric accessory drive 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is set in one of a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and an open state (support state or guide state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the right operating port 37 is closed by retreating the electric accessory 37a toward the inside of the game board 31 so as to prevent game balls from entering the right operating port 37. The open state is a state in which the right operating port 37 is opened so that a game ball enters the right operating port 37 by advancing the electric accessory 37a toward the window panel 22 and projecting from the game board 31. is there.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the electric accessory 37a and falls.
When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the game ball utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a and enters the right operating port 37 along this plate surface. Will do. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is required to enter the right operating port 37 over time while swinging on this plate surface. Become.
Therefore, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot win the right operating port 37, and when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the right operating port 37a cannot be won. You can win.

  The gaming board 31 has a right out port 391 provided on the right side of the electric accessory 37a. The right out port 391 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The right out port 391 has the same function as the out port 39 provided at the lowermost portion of the game area of the game board 31. Specifically, the game ball that has entered the right out port 391 joins the game ball that has entered the out port 39, and is detected by the detection sensor 40e disposed on the back side of the game board 31. It has become.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward so that game balls flowing down the game area can enter, a door 38b for opening and closing the large winning opening 38a, and a door 38b. And a variable winning drive unit 38c.
In addition, the player strikes the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 as the maximum, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit portion is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

Here, the game board 31 includes a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38. The cover 381 is provided with a transparent (or translucent) transparent panel 381a so that the variable winning device 38 can be viewed from the front side, and is provided around the transparent panel 381a, and is formed opaque. And a panel 381b (see FIG. 2).
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front via the transparent panel 381a and the window 21.

  The special winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the special winning opening 38a includes the detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening / closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the special winning opening 38a. The opening / closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, thereby closing the opening of the special winning opening 38a. 31, the opening of the special winning opening 38 a is opened. Here, when the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b and flows down to the out port 39 side along this plate surface. Will go. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b is formed in a flat shape, the game ball is flowed down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. Therefore, it immediately flows down to the outlet 39 side without taking time.
The variable winning drive unit 38c drives the open / close door 38b to set the open / close door 38b to one of an open state and a closed state.

Specifically, the opening / closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state where a game ball cannot be won. Then, in the internal lottery, the player wins the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, and when the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing door 38b is set to an open state in which game balls can win.
The opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening / closing door 38b is set to an open state and game balls can enter the special winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode, a period from when the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again is referred to as one round game.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the special winning opening 38a. The opening / closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, thereby closing the opening of the special winning opening 38a, and retreating toward the inside of the game board 31 to play the game. It has an open state in which the opening of the special winning opening 38a is opened by being buried in the board 31.
On the other hand, the opening / closing door may adopt another configuration. For example, the opening / closing door may be formed in a rectangular plate shape, and may be provided on the game board 31 so as to be rotatable around a lower side as a central axis. In this case, the opening and closing door is turned toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to open the large winning opening 38a, and turns toward the inside of the game board 31. It only has to have a closed state of closing the opening of the special winning opening 38a by moving and being buried in the game board 31.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main display device 42 has a main display unit 45 and an accessory display unit 46, and includes a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined mode, a dot display, and the like. And a plurality of display devices.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is smaller than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 42.

  The main display unit 45 includes a first result display unit 45 a for displaying a result of an internal lottery performed based on a winning in the central operating port 36, and an internal result performed based on a winning in the right operating port 37. A second result display section 45b for displaying the result of the lottery (see FIG. 5). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for specifying the number of round games in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode is set (or when the open / close execution mode is set). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the display of the variation of the picture triggered by the winning of the central operating port 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the central operating port 36 as a result of stopping the variable display. Display the result of When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b performs the display of the variation of the pattern with the winning of the right operating port 37 as a trigger, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the right operating port 37 as a result of the stop of the variable display. Display the result of If the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37 function as starting ball entry means for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter and executing an internal lottery when the game balls enter. I do.
Further, in the present embodiment, the right operating port 37 functions as a lottery device that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and executes an internal lottery when entering the game balls. The right operating port 37 is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and is in an open state in which the ball is entered in the right operating port 37, and is closed so that game balls flowing in the game area are not entered in the right operating port 37. It has an electric accessory 37a (guide piece) having a state, and an electric accessory drive section 37b (guide piece drive section) that sets the open or closed state by driving the electric accessory 37a.

  The display unit 46 for the character executes the display of the variation of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and, as a result of stopping the display of the variation, an internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. Display the result of If the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the electric utility open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric utility open state. In this open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operation port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are configured by segment displays, but are not limited thereto, and may be a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, It may be constituted by another type of display device such as a dot matrix. Further, as a pattern to be variably displayed on the main display section 45 and the accessory display section 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed. Or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed.

  The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 for variably displaying (variable display or switching display) a symbol which is a kind of a symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 provided so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause inconvenience such that the visibility of the display screen G is reduced due to the game balls falling. It has a configuration.

The symbol display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 47 starts displaying symbols in a variable manner based on winning in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. That is, the symbol display device 47 performs the variable display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and the variable display on the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, The variable display is executed accordingly.
Note that the symbol display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in a lower left area of the symbol display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in a lower right region of the symbol display device 47, and a symbol display. A third holding lamp portion 49c provided in an upper region of the device 47.

The first holding lamp portion 49a is a portion for displaying the number of game balls held in the central operating port 36, and is turned on according to the number of held game balls. The first holding lamp portion 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 45a and the symbol display device 47.
The second holding lamp portion 49b is a portion for displaying the number of held game balls that have won the right operating port 37, and lights up in accordance with the number of held balls. The second holding lamp portion 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 47.
The third holding lamp unit 49c is a part for displaying the number of game balls held in each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of held balls. The third holding lamp unit 49c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 46.
Each of the holding lamp portions 49a to 49c may have another configuration such as being displayed as an image on a part of a symbol display device 47 described later.

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 4, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is partitioned into three rows of display areas, and each display area includes a left symbol row Z1, a middle symbol row Z2, and a right symbol in order from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, eight types of symbols consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from below to above, and "1" is arranged after "8". It is configured. In FIG. 4, the center line of each display area is indicated by a one-dot chain line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on winning in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbols, the effect for the game round is executed on the display screen G. The effect for the game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L. End with state.
That is, the game times refer to a period after the variable display is started on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 based on the winning in each of the operating ports 36 and 37, and until a predetermined stop result is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the symbol change display in the symbol display device 47 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, the symbols in each symbol row may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined, or may be a mode in which only a picture is used, instead of the mode using only numbers.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power supply that executes a firing control for causing the game ball firing mechanism 81 to fire game balls. And a launch control device 80. These devices are mounted on the backpack unit.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 for performing main control (main control) of a game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 for monitoring a power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may include a trace unit that leaves a trace when opened, or may have a trace structure that leaves a trace when opened. Specifically, as the trace means, a board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connection section (caulking section) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body, or a peeling-off method. At this time, a configuration may be adopted in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace that the adhesive layer has been peeled off because it remains on the bonding object is applied across the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are formed as one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but may be formed as individual chips. This is the same for MPUs of other control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage unit that does not require an external power supply when storing the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a hit / fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, a reach table storage area 63c, and a display duration table storage area 63d. These areas will be described later in detail.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply when retaining the stored information. It is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and a power saving area 64c. These areas will be described later in detail.

  The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. The output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory drive 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the right operating port 37, a variable winning drive 38c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. Section 45 and the accessory display section 46.

  The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 controls driving of various driving units and the like through the driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric-combination open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric-combination accessory driving unit 37b to open and close the electric combination 37a. In the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the driving of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open and close the special winning opening 38a. Further, in each game time, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in each of the operating ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and a power supply / emission control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors a DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 40a to 40f correspond one-to-one to the general winning opening 35, the central operating opening 36, the right operating opening 37, the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, and each through gate 41. Is provided. The MPU 62 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for various winning ports, the out port 39, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40f. In addition, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37.

  The payout control device 70 executes payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out a prize ball or a lending ball (a game ball to be lent to a player when playing a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. I do.

  The power supply / emission control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. The power supply / emission control device 80 generates necessary operating power for the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, and the like based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and generates the generated operation power. Supply power. The power supply / emission control device 80 includes a power supply unit at the time of power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power interruption supplies power for storage retention to the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 even when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

  In addition, the power supply / launch control device 80 executes launch control for causing the gaming ball launch mechanism 81 to launch game balls. Here, the game ball launching mechanism 81 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeder that supplies game balls stored in the upper plate 25a to the launch rail, And a solenoid which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34. The power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid to launch a game ball when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

<Electrical configuration for executing internal lottery in MPU 62 of main controller 60>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 6, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot occurrence lottery, uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot occurs, and determines whether or not to generate the reach display. Uses a reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and uses the fluctuation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for a lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the right operating port 37 is in the electric opening state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 5).

  Each time the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it is a loop counter that returns to 0. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the central operation port 36 or the right operation port 37. Is stored in a reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 5) provided as an acquired information storage means. Also, of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is stored in the electric utility holding area 64c of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 5) at the timing when the game ball wins each through gate 41. Is done.

  The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a reserved area Ra for a first result display unit, a reserved area Rb for a second result display unit, and an execution area AE.

  The first result display section reserved area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 sets each set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the central operating port 36. Store. Specifically, when the winning in the central operating port 36 occurs plural times consecutively, the MPU 62 stores the hold information in the order of the first area Ra1, the second area Ra2, the third area Ra3, and the fourth area Ra4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the first result display section holding area Ra has four storage areas, up to four winning prizes of game balls to the central operating port 36 are held. Further, the first result display section holding area Ra has a storage area for writing the number of holdings stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
It should be noted that the number of reserves relating to the central working port 36 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plural such as two, three, or five or more, and is singular. You may.

  The second result display section holding area Rb provided as the second acquisition information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 sets the value set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as holding information in time series in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the right operating port 37. Store. Specifically, the MPU 62 stores the hold information in the order of the first area Rb1, the second area Rb2, the third area Rb3, and the fourth area Rb4 when the winning in the right operating port 37 occurs plural times consecutively. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display section holding area Rb includes four storage areas, up to four winning prizes of game balls to the right operating port 37 are held. In addition, the second result display section holding area Rb has a storage area for writing the number of holdings stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
It should be noted that the number of reserves related to the right operating port 37 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plural such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. You may.

  The execution area AE stores the hold information stored in the storage area of the first result display part holding area Ra or the second result display part holding area Rb when the variable display of each of the result display parts 45a and 45b is started. Is an area for moving.

The power saving area 64c includes four storage areas, like the first result display section holding area Ra and the second result display section holding area Rb. Therefore, winning of a game ball to each through gate 41 is suspended up to a maximum of four.
It should be noted that the number of reserves pertaining to each through gate 41 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plurals such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. You may.

<Detailed description of each counter>
Hereinafter, details of each counter will be described.
First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 250 each time the update is performed. ing.
The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the electric utility holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. You.
Then, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the right operating port 37 is to be in the electric-power-opening state based on the value of the electric-power-object opening counter C4 stored in the electric-power holding area 64c (electrically-powered combination). Object release lottery).

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequencies at which game balls can be awarded to the right operating port 37 are different from each other by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is relatively low. It has a relatively high high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

  In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric-power-open state is the same (for example, both are 4/5) in the electric-power-use-object open lottery. However, in the high frequency support mode, as compared with the low frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state when the electrification is elected is increased, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The opening time for one operation is longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state during each opening in the single electrical opening state is shorter than the single opening time. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode is different from the low-frequency support mode in that the minimum required time (standby time) that is secured as a waiting time from the end of the electric auditors goods opening lottery to the next electric auditors goods opening lottery is performed. The duration of one change display on the object display unit 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game balls are more likely to win the right operating port 37 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the player makes a left-handed operation with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being medium, and the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to reach the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area. By shifting from the side to the center, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the central operating port 36 rather than the right operating port 37. In the high-frequency support mode, the player makes a right-handed operation with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and determines the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area on the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit portion is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37 rather than the central operating port 36 can be increased.
When a winning in the right operating port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of the game balls. It can be carried out.

  In this manner, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 easily causes the game ball to enter the central operation port 36 and hardly causes the game ball to enter the right operation port 37 (the left-handed route (the 1) and a right-handed route (second route) in which it is easy for game balls to enter the right operating port 37 and difficult to enter game balls in the central operating port 36. I have.

  The configurations of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are not limited to these. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric-power-open state in the electric-power-use-object opening lottery as compared to the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of securing times may be prepared, and the high frequency support mode may be configured to make it easier to select a short securing time as compared with the low frequency support mode. May be shortened. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode sets the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high as compared with.

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 599 every time it is updated. . The jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time the circuit loops one round. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, similarly to the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. Is stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball has won the central operation port 36, and the game ball has won the right operation port 37. It is stored in the second result display section reserved area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery (win / fail lottery) based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a winning / failing table storing the values of random numbers to be won for the occurrence of a big hit.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number winning the jackpot occurrence is stored in a hit / fail table storage area 63a (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit / fail information group storage means as shown in FIG. (Acceptance information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning / decreasing lottery modes: a low-probability mode (low-probability state) in which it is difficult to win a jackpot, and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) in which it is easy to win a jackpot. . In addition, the success / failure table includes a success / failure table for low-probability mode shown in FIG. 7A (a success / failure information group for low probability) and a success / failure table for high-probability mode shown in FIG. Group).
The MPU 62 executes the lottery for the occurrence of the big hit by comparing the winning / failure table with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These win / fail tables have a plurality of win results (win / win results) of “big hit win”, “special miss result”, and “normal miss result”.
Specifically, in the gaming state in which the winning / losing table for the low-probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery of the jackpot occurrence, as shown in FIG. And the value of the random number that becomes the “special outlier” is two, and the value of the random number that becomes the “normal outlier” is another value. Therefore, under the gaming state in which the winning / losing result is referred to the winning / losing table for the low probability mode at the time of the lottery, the probability of the winning / failing result being “big hit winning” and “special loss result” is 1/300, respectively. The probability that the pass / fail result is “normally out of order result” is 298/300.

  On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / losing table for the high-probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery of the jackpot occurrence, as shown in FIG. And the number of random numbers that are “normally out of order” is 28, and the value of random numbers that are “extraordinarily out of order” is any other value. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the winning or losing result is referred to the winning or losing table for the high-probability mode at the time of the lottery, the probability of the winning or losing result being "big hit" is about 1/30, and the winning or losing result is "special outlier". The probability of "result" is about 11/12, and the probability of the pass / fail result being "normally out of order result" is about 1/20.

  The value and number of random numbers stored in each winning / failing table are arbitrary, and the high probability mode only needs to have a higher probability of being a “big hit” than the low probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that is “big hit” stored in the hit table for high probability mode does not include the value of the random number that is “big hit” stored in the hit table for low probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the value of the random number that is “big hit” stored in the low probability mode winning / failing table.

In addition, in each of the winning / rejecting lottery modes, a result other than the value of the random number that becomes “big hit” does not win the big hit occurrence and results in a miss.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of miss results, a “special miss result (small hit result)” and a “normal miss result”. These departure results are common in that they are not triggers for shifting to the success / failure lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the “special departure result” is a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, whereas the “normal departure result” is not a trigger for switching to the opening / closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 29 every time it is updated. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the central operation port 36 or the right operation port 37. Is stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball has won the central operation port 36, and the game ball has won the right operation port 37. It is stored in the second result display section reserved area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the type of the jackpot when a jackpot occurs.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values relating to the distribution type of the jackpot.
As shown in FIG. 8, the random number value related to the big hit type distribution destination is stored in a distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 5) of a ROM 63 provided as distribution information group storage means. (Minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8A and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8B. ing.
The MPU 62 executes the jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the first result display section holding area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winning in the central operating port 36. It is a table referred to when performing a lottery of a jackpot type.
As shown in FIG. 8A, the first distribution table includes “low-probability result (low-probability special distribution result)” and “explicit low-round high-probability result (low-probability high-probability result)”. , And a plurality of distribution results of “most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)” are the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are allocated to “low-probability results”, and “10 to 19” are allocated to “explicit small rounds”. "Highly accurate result" and "20-29" as "most advantageous result".

The second distribution table stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display section holding area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winning in the right operating port 37. It is a table referred when performing a lottery of a jackpot type.
As shown in FIG. 8B, the second distribution table has two distribution results, “low-probability result” and “most advantageous result”, as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are allocated to “low-probability results”, and “10 to 29” are allocated to “most advantageous results”. ".

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / fail lottery mode after completion of opening / closing execution mode (2) Support mode after completion of opening / closing execution mode (3) Mode of opening / closing control of variable winning device 38 in opening / closing execution mode

First, the difference between the winning / rejecting lottery modes in (1) will be described.
The “low-probability result” is a distribution result in which the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the completion of the opening / closing execution mode regardless of the success / failure lottery mode before the completion of the opening / closing execution mode. This low-probability mode is continued at least until the winning or losing lottery becomes “big hit prize”.
The “explicit small round high-probability result” and the “most advantageous result” are distribution results in which the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode after the completion of the opening / closing execution mode regardless of the success / failure lottery mode before the completion of the opening / closing execution mode. This high-probability mode is continued at least until "winning win" is achieved in the win / fail lottery.

Next, the difference between the support modes (2) will be described.
The “low-probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference frequency (specifically, 100 times).

  The “explicit small round high-probability result” and the “most advantageous result” are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the opening / closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode is continued at least until "winning winning" is achieved in the winning / non-winning lottery.

  The difference in the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening / closing execution mode (3) will be described later in detail.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 238 each time the value is updated. .
The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. Is stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball has won the central operation port 36, and the game ball has won the right operation port 37. It is stored in the second result display section reserved area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that is generated when a “normal loss result” is obtained without being a “big hit” in the winning / rejecting lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the value of the reach table and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the holding ball storage area 64b when the “winning result” does not result in the “winning result” in the winning / rejection lottery. By performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display, a reach display is generated when the reach display is to be generated in this lottery. The reach table is a table that stores random number values related to the occurrence of reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 (see FIG. 5).

  If the winning lottery is determined to be a "big hit" and the sorting lottery is assigned to the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 47 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. Are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. In addition, when the winning lottery is determined to be "big hit" and the sorting lottery is assigned to the "low-probability result", the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. Is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In addition, if the winning lottery is determined to be a "big hit win" and the sorting lottery is sorted to "explicit small round high-accuracy result", or if the winning or rejecting lottery is not a "big hit winning", it will be a "special loss result" In this case, the symbol display device 47 has, as a stop result, not a combination of symbols having the same number, but different numbers that are not selected in the case of a “normally out of order result” in the winning / rejecting lottery. A special symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line L.

  In the reach display, when a combination of symbols having the same number is finally stopped and displayed (the "winning win" in the win / fail lottery, it is sorted into the "most advantageous result" or the "low-probability result" in the sorting lottery) Occurs) regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is used when a special combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed (when the winning or losing lottery is determined to be "big hit" and when the sorting lottery is assigned to "explicit small round high probability result", In the case of a “winning result” without a “winning result” in the winning / rejecting lottery, no occurrence occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In the reach display mode, some of the symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 are displayed on the active line L. By stopping and displaying, the same combination of symbols is displayed to indicate the stop result, and the remaining symbol columns (for example, symbol column Z2) are variably displayed in that state.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 generates the reach display, and after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 and before displaying the predetermined stop result, the win / win lottery becomes “big hit”, In the sorting lottery, the player can be expected to have been sorted to the "low-probability result" or the "most advantageous result".

  The mode of the reach display is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol columns is stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol columns are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after each symbol row is reduced or displayed.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a type of variable display of the symbol display device 47. The expected effect is such that after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the player is expected to have won “big hit” in the winning / rejecting lottery. Directing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, the above-described reach display and the notice display.

The notice display will not be `` big hit win '' in the win / win lottery if it is `` big hit win '' in the win / win lottery or if it is `` special loss result '' without becoming `` big hit win '' in the win / win lottery This is an expected effect that makes the effect more likely to occur than when the result is “normally out of order”. This notice display may make it easier to select an effect with a low appearance rate, instead of making it easier to generate an effect, or may combine them.
The lottery for generating the reach display has been performed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery for generating the notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 90. .

The mode of the preview display is a part of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 variably displayed among a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (for example, some symbol rows (for example, In a situation where the symbol array Z1) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L and a plurality of symbol arrays (for example, symbol arrays Z2, Z3) are displayed in a variable manner, or when a reach display is generated, a predetermined character is displayed. Are displayed on the display screen G as moving images. This notice is displayed both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set to be more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Have been.
The notice display is not limited to this. For example, the notice display may be displayed by changing the background, or the form of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198 every time it is updated. .
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process described later is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 45 and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<Regarding Various Processes Executed by Main Controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes a timer interrupt process and a normal process for advancing the game, and a main process started upon power-on. Hereinafter, the timer interrupt processing, the normal processing, and the main processing will be sequentially described.
The MPU 62 executes a timer interrupt process, a normal process, and a main process, as well as an NMI interrupt process that is started by input of a power failure signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal).

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the timer interrupt process.
In the timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 9, the MPU 62 executes Steps S101 to S105 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes a reading process of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the state of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f, determines the state, and stores the state in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to the various winning ports detect the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a prize ball command for giving a prize ball payout instruction, and sets the prize ball command. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 detects winning of a game ball, a prize ball command for designating 15 prize balls as a specific unit number. To the payout control device 70.
Note that the payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

  In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the updated value, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. I do. When the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it.

  In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 by adding 1 to each of the previous values. The latter value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. When the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of each of the counters C1 to C4, the value of each of the counters C1 to C4 is reset to 0 and cleared.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for through. In the prize-for-through processing, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected a prize of a game ball, the MPU 62 updates the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103. Is stored in the electrical activity holding area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the third holding lamp unit 49c, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 turns on the third holding lamp 49c based on a command transmitted from the MPU 62. As described above, the maximum number of game balls held in the through gate 41 is four, and the third holding lamp unit 49c is lit by the number corresponding to the held number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operating port.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the operating port will be described in detail.

<Winning process for working port>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the operating port.
In the winning opening process for the operating port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has won (started winning) the central operating port 36 by determining whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the central operating port 36 has detected a winning of the gaming ball. Is determined.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won the central operating port 36, in step S202 the MPU 62 determines the number of reserves stored in the reserve area Ra for the first result display unit, and The number is set in a predetermined storage area in the first result display unit holding area Ra as the first start holding storage number RaN. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S207.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won the central operating port 36, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the right operating port 37 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won. It is determined whether or not a game ball has won (started winning) the right operating port 37 by determining whether or not the game ball is detected.
If the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has not won the right operating port 37 in step S203, the winning processing for the operating port ends. If the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won the right operating port 37, in step S204 the MPU 62 determines the number of reserves stored in the second result display section reserve area Rb, The retained number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display section reserved area Rb as the second start reserved storage number RbN.

In step S205, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in the step S205 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the processing from the step S207.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes a right operating port closing execution process in step S206. In the closing process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery. The accessory 37a is set to the closed state. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S207.

After executing the processing of step S202 or step S206, or when it is determined in step S205 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S207 that the start holding set in step S202 or step S204 is suspended. It is determined whether or not the storage number N (RaN or RbN) is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment).
If the MPU 62 determines in step S207 that the number N of pending start storages is not smaller than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the winning processing for the operating port. If the MPU 62 determines in step S207 that the number N of pending storages is less than the upper limit, the MPU 62 updates the value of the number N of pending storages in step S208 by adding one.

  In step S209, the MPU 62 stores the set of each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the result display part holding area. The information is stored as the hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start hold storage number N updated in step S208.

  For example, the MPU 62 sets each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process when the first start pending storage number RaN is set in step S202. The set of values is stored as the hold information in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first result display section hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S208. For example, when the MPU 62 sets “3” to the first startup suspended storage number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 sets the first startup suspended storage number RaN in the storage area corresponding to “4” updated in step S208. The suspension information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

  Further, for example, when the second startup hold storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 62 sets the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. Are stored as the hold information in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second result display section holding area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second startup hold storage number RbN updated in step S208. I do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets “3” to the second start-pending storage number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 sets the storage area corresponding to “4” of the second starting-holding storage number RbN updated in step S208. The suspension information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

In step S209, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first holding lamp unit 49a or the second holding lamp unit 49b, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 turns on the first holding lamp unit 49a or the second holding lamp unit 49b based on a command transmitted from the MPU 62. The number of game balls that have won the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37 is up to four, as described above, and the first holding lamp 49a or the second holding lamp 49b Lights up by the number corresponding to.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process to be described later, which is started when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes Steps S301 to S309 at a period of 4 msec, repeatedly executes Steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and performs Steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of Step S308. Execute.

  In step S301, the MPU 62 executes a timer interrupt process or an external output process for transmitting the command set in the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize ball command is set, and when it is determined that the prize ball command is set, the MPU 62 sends the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Send. In addition, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for an effect such as a command corresponding to an effect for a game round or a command corresponding to an effect for an opening / closing execution mode is set. If it is determined that it has been set, the effect command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds and updates the previous value of the variation type counter CS by one, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . If the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the MPU 62 returns the value of the variation type counter CS to 0 and clears it.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes a game turn control process for advancing the game turn. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes the winning / failing lottery and the sorting lottery, determines the information on the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 47, and finally stops and displays the symbol on the main display unit 45. , Etc., is determined.
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes a game state shift process for shifting the game state. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each game state such as the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode.
The game number control processing in step S303 and the game state transition processing in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes a demonstration display execution determination process. In this demonstration display execution determination processing, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period for demonstration start (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without starting a new game round after the game round has ended. If it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62.

  Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is performed. For example, if the start waiting period is set to 30 seconds and the interval at which the process of step S305 is repeatedly executed is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and reaches 7500 times. Is determined to have elapsed. The configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary. For example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, when the MPU 62 starts a new game while counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, the MPU 62 resets the count value.

  In step S <b> 306, the MPU 62 executes a process for supporting electric power for executing the drive control of the electric accessory 37 a provided in the right operating port 37. In the electric role support processing, the MPU 62 executes the electric character opening lottery based on the value of the electric character opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and executes the electric character opening lottery. When the winning is achieved, the opening and closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Specifically, when the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 controls the driving of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state. When the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state and determines that a predetermined time has elapsed without a game ball winning the right operating port 37, the MPU 62 drives the electric accessory drive 37b. The control is executed to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

  In step S307, the MPU 62 executes a game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply / fire control device 80 to execute launch control for launching a game ball based on the player rotating the firing handle 27. Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 80 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch game balls by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 seconds in the present embodiment). . In addition, the solenoid is excited so as to fire the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27. Further, the power supply / firing control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball firing mechanism 81 to fire a game ball when predetermined firing conditions are satisfied.

  In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it is confirmed that a power failure has occurred. Note that this power failure flag is cleared at the next execution of the main processing.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 64 and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 into the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 into the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

  If the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the processing at the time of power failure in step S312 and subsequent steps without executing the processing in step S309 and subsequent steps. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (the checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag has not been set, then in step S309, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is time to execute the next normal processing, that is, the current normal processing is performed. It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that it is not time to execute the next normal process, that is, if the remaining time has occurred, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S310, and executes step S311. , The variation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it is determined in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, if the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes step S301 again, thereby executing the next process. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a startup process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after turning on the power in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to become operable. ) Waits.

  In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec, which is a permission prohibition period, has elapsed. If it is determined in step S402 that 1 second has not elapsed, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the processing in step S402. If it is determined in step S402 that 1 second has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S403 and subsequent steps.

  Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 second has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S402. For example, when the interval at which the process of step S402 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed, and determines that 1 second has elapsed when the number of executions reaches 10,000. The configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power / emission control device 80 is turned on.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erasure switch is on, it executes the processing of step S409 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erasure switch is not turned on in step S404, it determines in step S405 whether the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. I do.

If the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag has not been set in step S405, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S409 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, it calculates a RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 62 checks the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. More specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value stored in step S313 (processing at the time of power failure) of the normal processing. The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S409 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, it clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

  Note that the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 in a power interruption process. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining in the main process whether or not the keyword has been correctly written.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erasure switch is ON, determines in step S405 that the power failure flag has not been set, or determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value has been set. If it is determined that is not normal, the processing after step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

  Therefore, for example, the administrator of the game arcade can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business operation of the game arcade. The pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the processing of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the control board on the sub side (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S411, and in step S412, executes the timer interrupt. The occurrence of the process is permitted, and the process proceeds to the normal process described above.
The sub-side control board recognizes that the communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed by receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, and executes its own initialization. I do.

<Game round control process>
FIG. 13 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the game times control process.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the operation is in the open / close execution mode. If the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that it is in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 ends the game round control processing without executing the processing of step S502 and thereafter. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
Note that the MPU 62 determines whether or not the vehicle is in the open / close execution mode by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag when shifting to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag when the open / close execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that it is not in the open / close execution mode, it determines in step S502 whether the main display unit 45 is performing variable display, that is, the game is in progress. It is determined whether or not.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round progress processing in steps S506 to S509.

First, the processing for starting the game round in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 determines the number of holds stored in the first result display unit holding area Ra and the number of holds stored in the second result display unit holding area Rb. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN is equal to or less than “0”. If the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 ends the game turn control processing.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 determines in step S504 that the first result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area Ra. A data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for use in the game round is executed. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 executes the variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to exhaust the game times, and ends the game time control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process of step S504 and the variation start process of step S505 will be described in detail.

FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN of the second result display section holding area Rb set in step S204 of the winning opening processing for the working port is equal to or less than “0”. I do. If the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start-pending storage number RbN is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes data setting processing for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606, and proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the number RbN of second startup suspension storage is not equal to or less than “0”, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

As described above, the data setting process includes a data setting process for the first result display unit that sets the hold information stored in the first result display unit hold area Ra for the use of the game, and a second result display unit. And a data setting process for a second result display unit for setting the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for use in playing the game.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start-hold storage number RbN is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display unit, and executes the second result display unit. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is the hold information stored in the second result display section holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the right operating port 37, the MPU 62 sends the request to the central operating port 36. Regardless of whether or not there is any hold information stored in the first result display section holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball, the hold information stored in the second result display section hold area Rb is given priority over the game. Set for multiple digestions.

First, the data setting processing for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 updates the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the first result display unit holding area Ra by subtracting one.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display unit holding area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the first result display unit hold area Ra. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra4. Shift to area Ra3.

  In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag stored in the RAM 64. The second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 45 of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b is to start the variable display when the game is completed. It is. In step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display section flag, the MPU 62 variably displays the first result display section 45a on the basis of the winning of the game ball to the central operating port 36 when the game times are consumed. Is started.

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift-time command indicates that the shift of the hold information has been performed on the hold information stored in the first result display area holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball to the central operating port 36, and the voice light emission control device. 90 for information to be recognized.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp unit 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of lighted first lamps 49a in accordance with a decrease in the number of game balls that have won the central operation port 36.

Next, the data setting processing for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 updates the value of the second start hold storage number RbN of the second result display unit holding area Rb by subtracting one.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display unit holding area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 performs a data shift process of shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the second result display unit hold area Rb. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb4. Shift to area Rb3.

  In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, the MPU 62 fluctuates and displays the second result display section 45b on the basis of the winning of the game ball to the right operating port 37 when the game times are exhausted. Is started.

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift-time command indicates that the shift of the hold information has been performed for the hold information stored in the second result display section holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the right operating port 37, and the voice light emission control device. 90 for information to be recognized.
The sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp unit 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of lighted second holding lamp units 49b as the number of held game balls winning the right operating port 37 decreases.

FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the change start process.
In the change start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is not the high probability mode, in step S702, the MPU 62 stores the low / probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7A) from the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. If it is determined that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode in step S701, the winning / rejecting table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 7B) is read from the winning / rejection table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S703. read out.

  After executing the processing of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes a hit / fail determination process in step S704. In the success / failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success / failure table read out in step S702 or step S703, and thereby determines the result of the success / failure lottery (the success / failure result). Is determined. As described above, the success / failure result is one of “big hit win”, “special loss result”, and “normal loss result”. Even if the success / absence lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is the high probability mode. It is the same as above.

  In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether the result of the determination in step S704 is "big hit". If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the result is "big hit", it executes the processing in step S706 and subsequent steps. If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the result is not "big hit", , And executes the processing after step S712.

First, in step S705, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / failing result is "big hit" (processing after step S706) will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether the second result display section flag has been set in the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display section flag has not been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts changing display on the first result display section 45a based on winning of a game ball to the central operating port 36. In step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 8A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S707.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the right operating port 37 is performed. In step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 8B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S708.

  After executing the processing of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 62 executes the distribution determination processing in step S709. In this distribution determination processing, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708, thereby obtaining a result of the distribution lottery ( Distribution result).

  In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information on the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. It is determined according to the distribution result, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 compares the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, so that the pattern finally displayed on the main display unit 45 is displayed. Determine such information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the pattern of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 for each distribution result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag corresponding to the distribution result determined in step S709 in the RAM 64. Specifically, the MPU 62 sets the low-probability result flag when specifying that the distribution result is “low-probability result”, and specifies the “specific low-round high-probability result” when specifying. , The explicit low round high-probability result flag is set, and when it is specified that the result is the “most advantageous result”, the most advantageous result flag is set. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S716.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the win / fail result is not “big hit win” (processing after step S712) in step S705 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result of the determination in step S704 is a “special off result”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the result is a "special off result", the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S713 and subsequent steps. , The processing after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for a special off result. In the stop result setting process for the special off result, the MPU 62 determines information on a picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is performed. The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in the ROM 63 in advance to determine the information on the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. The aspect of the picture set in the stop result table for the special departure result is different from the aspect of the picture set in the stop result table for the big hit result.
In step S714, the MPU 62 sets a special off flag in the RAM 64.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the success / failure result is a “special disconnection result” by referring to the special disconnection flag.

  On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for a normal deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result, the MPU 62 determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is performed. The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, thereby determining the information on the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the big hit result and the stop result table for the special deviation result.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 62 executes a process of setting a display continuation time (display continuation period) in step S716.

FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the display continuation time setting process.
In the display continuation time setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S808 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special off flag is set in the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines that the special off flag has not been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special off flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S806.

First, a description will be given of a process performed in the case where the MPU 62 determines that the special disconnection flag has not been set in the RAM 64 in the step S801 (process after the step S802).
In step S802, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

  In step S803, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a reach display occurs on the symbol display device 47. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result determined in step S709 is “low-probability result” or “most advantageous result”, and that the success / failure result determined in step S704 is “normal out-of-normal result”. At the same time, if the reach generation lottery is won, it is determined that the reach display is generated. As described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved sphere storage area 64b. Execute the reach generation lottery.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that a reach display will occur, the MPU 62 reads the reach generation display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the reach display does not occur in step S803, the MPU 62 reads the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S805. read out.

Next, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the special disconnection flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S801 (the processing after step S806) will be described.
In step S806, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode.

If it is determined in step S806 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (if the winning / rejecting lottery mode is determined to be the low-probability mode), the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802 described above.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special display duration stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Is read.

After executing any one of the steps S804, S805, and S807, the MPU 62 determines the display duration in step S808. Specifically, when the MPU 62 reads the reach generation display duration table or the reach non-display duration table, the MPU 62 refers to each display duration table and acquires the display duration table from the fluctuation type counter buffer. The display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64. When reading the special display duration, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in a display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
The special display duration is shorter than the display duration determined with reference to the reach generation display duration table and the reach non-display duration table.

Here, the display continuation time table for non-reach occurrence is set so that the display continuation time becomes shorter as the number of holdings increases. Therefore, the display continuation time when the hold information on the central operating port 36 is digested is set to be shorter as the number of holdings on the central operating port 36 increases. The display continuation time when the hold information related to the right operating port 37 is digested is set to be shorter as the number of held items related to the right operating port 37 increases. In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high frequency support mode than when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display continuation time in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-display duration table.

  Note that the display duration table for non-reach occurrence may be set to a relationship opposite to the above-described relationship, such as increasing the display duration as the number of holdings increases, depending on the number of holdings and the support mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that does not change. Further, a display duration time table may be individually set for each of the pass / fail result and the distribution result.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing, the processing after step S717 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S717, the MPU 62 sets a change command and a type command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the change command and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This processing will be described later in detail.

The change command includes information relating to the display continuation time. Further, the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not the reach display is generated.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-display duration table are mutually different. Is different.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the reach display is generated is not included in the fluctuation command, the reach display is performed by the sound emission control device 90 as the sub-side control device based on the information on the display duration. It is possible to determine whether this occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the fluctuation command indirectly includes information on whether or not the reach display is to be generated. Note that the change command may directly include information on whether or not the reach display occurs.

  In addition, since the special display duration is shorter than the display duration determined with reference to the reach generation display duration table and the reach non-display duration table, the special display duration is based on the information related to the display duration. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not the display continuation time is the special display continuation time by the sound emission control device 90 as the sub-side control device. In this sense, it can be said that the change command indirectly includes information on the special display duration time. Note that the variation command may directly include information on the special display continuation time.

The type command includes information on the success / failure result. In other words, the type command includes, as information relating to the success / failure result, respective information relating to the “big hit win”, the “special deviation result”, and the “normal deviation result”. Further, the type command includes information on the distribution result. In other words, the type command includes, as information on the distribution result, information on “low-probability result”, “explicit small-round high-probability result”, and “most advantageous result”.
In the following description, the success / failure result and the distribution result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command includes information relating to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the change start processing.
Specifically, if the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 determines whether the first ball is to be played based on the winning of the game ball to the central operating port 36 when the game times are consumed. Since it is indicated that the variable display is to be started on the result display unit 45a, the variable display is started on the first result display unit 45a.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 determines whether the second result display section flag has been set based on the winning of the game ball to the right operating port 37 when the game time is consumed. Since it indicates that the variable display is to be started on the result display unit 45b, the variable display is started on the second result display unit 45b.

Returning to the description of the game turn control processing, the game turn progress processing of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

  In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the change start processing has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 has become “0” or less. The value of the display continuation time counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, it executes a variable display process in step S507. In the change display processing, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 45 during the change display. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 62 executes a change end process. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 uses the information (main memory) stored in the RAM 64 in any one of the steps S710, S713, and S715 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display. The information relating to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45 is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display unit 45 so as to display a pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display unit 45 during the variable display.

Here, the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is different for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can check the game result by viewing the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, for example, the manager of the amusement arcade can easily confirm whether or not an improper act of causing the pachinko machine 10 to perform the same behavior as in the case of winning the jackpot occurrence lottery is performed. Can be done
The display area of the main display unit 45 is smaller than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 are the symbol columns to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player checks the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not a big hit has been won, and so on. The degree of attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a change end command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the change end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
The sound emission control device 90 executes a process for terminating the effect of the game based on the fluctuation end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring the reception of the fluctuation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 17 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S917 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether the operation is in the open / close execution mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that it is not in the open / close execution mode, it executes the processing of step S902 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is being performed, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S914.

First, in step S901, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (processing after step S902) will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether the variable display on the main display unit 45 has been completed. If the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has not ended, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has ended, then in step S903, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the success / failure result corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode. Is determined. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win / fail result is “big hit win” or “special loss result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the result of the determination corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S904.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the hit / fail result does not correspond to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode (if it determines that the hit / fail result is “normally out of order result”), the game is played. The state transition processing ends.

In step S904, the MPU 62 determines whether the result is a "special off result".
If the MPU 62 determines in the step S904 that the result is the “special out-of-special result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from the step S905.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the result is not a “special deviation result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes in and after step S911.

First, in step S904, a process performed when the MPU 62 determines that the result is a "special outlier" (process after step S905) will be described.
In step S905, the MPU 62 sets “2” to the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. The opening / closing counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the large winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / absent lottery mode is the high probability mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning / rejection lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 waits for the small-hit start time (standby). “50” is set as the period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec. The waiting time for starting the small hit is not limited to this, and is arbitrary.

In step S908, the MPU 62 sets a small hit command. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing. The small hit command includes information on a game result that has triggered the shift to the open / close execution mode. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the small hit command set in step S908 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the open / close execution mode based on the small hit command transmitted from the MPU 62 and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is not the high probability mode (determines that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode), the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the various counters of the RAM 64 The timer counter T provided in the area 64a is set to "1000" as an opening standby time (standby period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and is arbitrary.

In step S910, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing. The opening command includes information on a game result that triggered the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S910 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62 and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, a description will be given of a process when the MPU 62 determines in the step S904 that the result is not a “special out-of-spec” result (the process after the step S911).
In step S911, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a small round high probability result (“explicit small round high probability result”).

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S911 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, the MPU 62 sets “2” to a round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S912. If the MPU 62 determines in step S911 that the distribution result is not a small round high-accuracy result, that is, if the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is “low-probability result” or “most advantageous result”, In S913, “15” is set to the round counter RC. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of open / close execution modes having different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as the opening / closing execution mode, a round number regulation mode to be shifted to when the result is “big hit”, and an opening / closing number to be shifted to when the result is “special loss result”. And a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode is terminated on condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening / closing number regulation mode is ended on condition that the predetermined number of times of opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a has been executed, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the special winning opening 38a. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the open / close counter SOC. This open / closed number regulation mode does not end on the condition that the number of round games is executed.

The pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the special winning opening 38a once per round game. In addition, one round game is continued until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the open / close door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration) elapses. (2) The total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a reaches the predetermined upper limit number.

  After executing the processing of step S912 or S913, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S909 and thereafter.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the success / failure result corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 does not depend on the type of the game result except for the special out-of-order result in the high probability mode. The opening standby time is set in the timer counter T. In other words, the opening waiting time is the same regardless of the type of the game result, except for the special out-of-order result in the high probability mode.
The opening standby time is not limited to this, and may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result, for example, to such an extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is significantly different between the case where the game result is “low-probability result” or the “most advantageous result” and the case where the game result is other than these. It may be configured to make a large difference depending on the type.

Next, a description will be given of a process when the MPU 62 determines in the opening / closing execution mode in the step S901 (the process after the step S914).
In step S914, the MPU 62 executes a special winning opening opening / closing process.

FIG. 18 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening opening and closing process.
In the special winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1025 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special winning opening 38a is being opened.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the special winning opening 38a is not being opened, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1002.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the special winning opening 38a is being opened, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1006.

First, in step S1001, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is not open (the processing after step S1002) will be described.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” or less and the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than “0”, the special winning opening / closing process ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the timer counter T It is determined whether the value is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than “0” in step S1003, the MPU 62 executes a special winning opening opening process in step S1004.
Hereinafter, the special winning opening processing of step S1004 will be described in detail.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process.
In the special winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1107 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the success / failure result is a “special off result”.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the result is a "special outlier", in step S1102, the MPU 62 sets "1" to a winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. In S1103, “85” is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the result is not the “special loss result”, the MPU 62 sets “8” in the winning counter PC in step S1104, and determines the distribution result in step S1105. Is a small round high probability result (“explicit small round high probability result”).

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is a small round highly accurate result, the MPU 62 sets “85” in the timer counter T in step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not a small round highly accurate result, it sets “15000” in the timer counter T in step S1106. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

  After executing the processing of Step S1103 or Step S1106, the MPU 62 executes an opening execution processing of the special winning opening 38a in Step S1107. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening and closing door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening process.

Note that the value set in the winning counter PC in step S1102 or step S1104 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 defines the upper limit continuation time from the time when the door 38b is set to the open state to the time when the door 38b is set to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting “85” or “15000” in the timer counter T. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-term mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-term mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec shorter than that of the long mode. Mode).

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball firing mechanism 81 to fire game balls by exciting the solenoid of the game ball firing mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the result is not the “special out-of-special result”, the MPU 62 sets “8” in the winning counter PC as described above, thereby playing the game to the special winning opening 38a. The upper limit of the total number of winning balls is set to eight.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of the game balls to the special winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, so that the upper limit of eight game balls is set. It is easy to make the big prize port 38a win.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of the game balls to the special winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the launch of the game balls). (Shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to make the game ball win the large winning opening 38a. Note that, depending on the timing, it is possible to cause about one game ball to win the large winning opening 38a.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the result is a "special off result", the MPU 62 sets the winning counter PC to "1" as described above, thereby setting the special winning opening 38a. The upper limit of the total winning number of game balls is set to one. The upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of the game balls to the special winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (further, it is shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls). (Short), it is difficult to make the game ball win the large winning opening 38a. Depending on the timing, about one game ball can be made to win in the special winning opening 38a.

Returning to the description of the special winning opening opening and closing process, the process after step S1005 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the special winning opening opening process in step S1004, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1005. This release command includes information on the round counter RC. Each time the round game is executed, the value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC. In other words, the release command includes information on the number of times the round game has been executed. Further, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1005 to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening opening / closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is being opened (the processing after step S1006) in step S1001 will be described.
In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 of the special winning opening opening process has elapsed.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S1007 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when determining in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1018 and thereafter.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than “0” in step S1006 (processing after step S1007) will be described.
In step S1007, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a winning in the special winning opening 38a has occurred. The determination as to whether or not a winning has occurred in the special winning opening 38a is performed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the special winning opening 38a.

If the MPU 62 determines in the step S1007 that the winning in the special winning opening 38a has not occurred, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening opening and closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that a winning has occurred in the special winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 updates the value of the winning counter PC by subtracting 1 in step S1008.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than “0”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes a closing execution process in step S1010. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c.

In step S1011, the MPU 62 sets a close command. This closing command includes information on the round counter RC. Each time the round game is executed, the value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC. In other words, the close command includes information on the number of times the round game has been executed. The MPU 62 transmits the close command set in Step S1011 to the sound emission control device 90 in Step S301 of the normal processing.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b has been set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether the result is a "special off result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the result is the "special off result", the MPU 62 sets the value of the open / close counter SOC to "0", and then executes the processing in step S1024 and later described later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the result is not the “special result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S1013 and subsequent steps.
In step S1013, the MPU 62 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting one.

In step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not less than “0” in step S1014, it sets “500” to the value of the timer counter T in step S1015. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening opening / closing process.

  Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is a waiting time for opening and closing the door 38b after setting the door 38b to the open state and then setting the door 38b to the open state again. Time is prescribed. In the present embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 second. The opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1016 and thereafter.
In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets “2000” as the ending standby time (standby period) in the timer counter T. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is 4 seconds. The waiting time for ending is not limited to this, and is arbitrary.

The ending waiting time is the same as the opening waiting time, irrespective of the type of game result, except for a special out-of-order result in the high probability mode. That is, the waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of the opening / closing execution mode, except for the special deviation result of the high probability mode.
The waiting time for ending is not limited to this, and may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result, for example, to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Also, for example, the ending standby time greatly differs between the case where the game result is a “low-probability result” or the “most advantageous result” and the case where the game result is a game result other than these. It may be configured to make a large difference depending on the type.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening opening / closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62 and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or smaller than “0” in step S1006 (processing after step S1018) will be described.
In step S1018, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process as in step S1010 described above.
In step S1019, the MPU 62 sets a close command as in step S1011 described above.

In step S1020, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the success / failure result is a “special off result”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the win / fail result is not the “special outlier result”, that is, if it determines that the win / fail result is “big hit win”, the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S1021 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the result is the "special off result", the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S1023 and thereafter.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the success / failure result is not the “special deviation result” (the processing after step S1021) in step S1020 will be described.
In step S1021, the MPU 62 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1022, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1015 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when determining in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S1016 and thereafter.

Next, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in the step S1020 that the success / failure result is the “special deviation result” (the processing after the step S1023) will be described.
In step S1023, the MPU 62 updates the value of the open / close counter SOC by subtracting one.

In step S1024, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open / close counter SOC is equal to or less than “0”. Here, in step S1012, when the MPU 62 determines that the result is a "special off result", or after executing step S1023, the MPU 62 executes step S1024.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S1015 and thereafter.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is equal to or less than “0”, in step S1025, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. .

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1025 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (ie, determines that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low-probability mode), the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S1016 and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1025 that the winning / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening opening / closing process. In other words, the waiting time for the ending is 0 sec in the special off result of the high probability mode.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S915 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the special winning opening opening / closing process in step S914, the MPU 62 determines in step S915 whether the value of the opening / closing counter SOC is “0” or less and the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less. judge.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S915 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than “0”, the game state transition processing ends.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than “0” in step S915, the value of the timer counter T is set to “in step S916”. "0" or less.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S916 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S916 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than “0”, it clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S917, The transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing.
Hereinafter, the shift processing at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode.
In the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1209 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high-probability result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high-probability result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1202 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not “the most advantageous result” or “the explicit small round high-probability result” in step S1201, the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S1205 and thereafter.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high-probability result" in step S1201 (the processing after step S1202) will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1203, the MPU 62 clears the number limit flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the frequency limit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the high frequency support mode is continued at least until the winning / rejection lottery becomes “big hit win”.

  In step S1204, the MPU 62 sets a high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. If the high probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the winning / rejecting lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued at least until “winning win” is achieved in the win / fail lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode.

  When ending the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags (low-probability result flag, explicit small round high-probability result flag, and most advantageous result flag) set in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result. ) And clear the special off flag. Also, step S205 of the winning process for the operating port described above, step S701 of the fluctuation start process, step S806 of the setting process of the display continuation time, step S906 of the game state transition process, and step of the special winning opening opening / closing process In S1025, the MPU 62 determines whether the high / low lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

Next, a description will be given of a process performed in the case where the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not “the most advantageous result” or “the explicit small round high-probability result” in the step S1201 (the process after the step S1205).
In step S1205, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “low-probability result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is not the “low-probability result” (determines that the hit / fail result is the “special out-of-spec result”), the MPU 62 ends the opening / closing execution mode transition process. I do.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is a “low-probability result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S1206 and thereafter.

  In step S1206, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the success / failure lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued until at least the "winning win" in the win / fail lottery and the distribution result is other than the "low probability result".

In step S1207, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1208, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1209, the MPU 62 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 64. If the number-of-times limit flag has already been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this flag. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times restriction flag is set, 100 times of the number of games, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter, Continue until the times have been digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times restriction flag when 100 games have been consumed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes in step S <b> 306 of the normal process, as the process for supporting the electronic role, but detailed description is omitted.

  In this way, if the winning lottery is "big hit" and the sorting result is "most advantageous result" or "explicit small round high accuracy result" in the sorting lottery, the gaming state is the current state. After the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends regardless of the game state, the mode is shifted to the high probability mode and the mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until the winning or losing lottery becomes “big hit prize”.

  In addition, if the winning or losing lottery is "big hit" and the sorting result is "low probability result" in the sorting lottery, the gaming state is the open / close execution mode regardless of the current gaming state (that is, After the end of the round number regulation mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until the winning / pulling lottery becomes “big hit”, and the high-frequency support mode does not become “big hit” in the winning / pulling lottery. Move to frequency support mode.

  In addition, when the winning or losing lottery does not result in "big hit winning", that is, when the winning or losing result becomes "special off result" or "normal off result" in the on or off lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37 as a trigger. It functions as a game state transition unit that shifts the game state from the normal control state (the low probability mode and the high probability mode) to the opening / closing execution mode.

<Electrical Configuration of Sound Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the audio light emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 21, the audio light emission control device 90 includes an audio light emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the audio light emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage unit that does not require external power supply when storing the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100.
The MPU 92 controls driving of the various lamp units 23, 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits a command resulting from analyzing these commands to the display control device 100. Note that the sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 constituting the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are combined into a chip. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

  The MPU 102 analyzes a command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 90, performs a predetermined calculation process based on the command, and controls the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 controls the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage unit that does not require external power supply when storing the stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103, and is a volatile memory that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is storage means.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 47. Since the VDP 105 is formed as an IC chip, the VDP 105 is also called a “drawing chip”. The substance of the VDP 105 is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 47. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various designs, a color pallet table referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the display content of the symbol display device 47 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

<Regarding timer interrupt processing executed by audio light emission control device 90>
FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a timer interrupt process executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes a timer interrupt process for causing the game to proceed. In this timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 92 executes Steps S2001 to S2005 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes a command storing process. In the command storing process, when receiving a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. Note that the MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 performs an effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines an effect for the game round, an effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. This effect determination processing will be described later in detail.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the contents of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution processing, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 24.

  In step S2004, the MPU 92 executes a demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period for demo start (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without a new game start being started after the game end. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 controls the light emission of the various lamp units 23 and performs the sound control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2005, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect determination process of step S2002 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100, and stores the various commands in the display control device 100. When it is determined that the timing for transmitting the command has been reached, the command is transmitted to the display control device 100.
Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 23 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process to execute an effect for a game round, an effect for an open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
If it is determined in step S2101 that each command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has been received, in step S2102 the game result is determined to be “the most advantageous result” or “low accuracy” based on the content of the type command. Is determined as “result”.

  If the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “most advantageous result” or the “low-probability result” in step S2102, the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S2103. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “most advantageous result”, the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result finally displayed on the payline L is displayed. The information relating to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined, and when it is determined that the game result is a “low-probability result”, the same even-numbered number is finally displayed on the activated line L as a stop result. The information relating to the combination of the symbols to have is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “low-probability result”, the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 the game result based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not the result is "normally out of order".
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is not “normally out of order result”, that is, if the game result is one of “special out of order result” and “explicit small round high accuracy result”, step S2105 , A common symbol determination process is executed. In the common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a special symbol combination as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but is a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected when a “normally out of order result” is obtained in the winning or losing lottery (for example, "3.4.1") is determined. Note that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of the game result.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is the “normally out-of-usage result”, in step S2106, the MPU 92 executes a normal out-of-usage symbol determination process. In the normal departure symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not reach display is to occur based on the content of the change command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the reach display is to occur, the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of the reach display symbols as a stop result to finally stop and display on the activated line L. The combination of the symbols in the reach display is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 outputs information related to a symbol combination different from the symbol combinations described above as a stop result to finally stop and display on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a special combination of symbols, and a combination of the symbols displayed in the reach display by lottery or the like.

  After executing any one of the steps S2103, S2105, and S2106, the MPU 92 executes an effect pattern determination process in a step S2107. In the effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a notice display.

  Further, based on the selected effect pattern, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

  In step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a change start command and a stop result command including information on the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S2103, step S2105, and step S2106. Then, the MPU 92 stores the change start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The change start command and the stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 stores, from the program ROM 103, a data table for causing the symbol display device 47 to display the start and stop results of the variable display based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92. read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on the data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, a cycle of 20 msec) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the activated line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the processing of step S2108, or when determining that the variation command and the type command have not been received in step S2101, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2109 and thereafter.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

If it is determined in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2113 and thereafter.
On the other hand, when determining in step S2109 that the MPU 92 has received the opening command, in step S2110, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 executes an opening / closing execution mode effect determination process corresponding to the type of the game result determined in step S2110. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode when determining in step S2110 that the game result is the “special off result”. If the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “explicit small round high-probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “most advantageous result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “low-probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
The continuation time of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is performed twice in a short time mode in the opening and closing execution mode. The durations of the effects C and D correspond to the times when the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is performed 15 times in a long time mode in the opening and closing execution mode.

  In addition, based on the selection result of the effects A to D, the MPU 92 performs the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

  In step S2112, the MPU 92 sets an opening / closing execution mode command including information related to the opening / closing execution mode effect selected in step S2111. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open / close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the command for the opening / closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on the data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, a cycle of 20 msec) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

After executing the processing of step S2112, or when determining in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2113 and thereafter.
In step S2113, the MPU 92 determines whether the small hit command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines that the small hit command has not been received in Step S2113, the MPU 92 executes the processing of Step S2116 and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines that the small hit command has been received in step S2113, the MPU 92 executes a small hit effect determination process in step S2114. In the process of determining the small hit effect, the MPU 92 selects the content of the small hit effect by referring to the effect table stored in the ROM 93 in advance.

  Further, based on the selected effect content, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

  In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets a small hit effect command related to the small hit effect determined in the small hit effect determination processing in step S2114. Then, the MPU 92 stores the small hit effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The small hit effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the small hit effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on the data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, a cycle of 20 msec) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the small hit effect.

After executing the processing in step S2115, or when determining that the small hit command has not been received in step S2113, the MPU 92 executes the processing in step S2116 and thereafter.
In step S2116, MPU 92 performs other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, the open command, the close command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination processing.

<Relationship between game result and game state>
Hereinafter, a relationship between a game result and a game state or the like based on execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a game result, a game state, and the like. Specifically, FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normally out of order result” and the game state and the like. The game result is arranged in the column direction, and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 24, as shown in FIG. 24, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the gaming result excluding the “normal loss result” is a “winning win” and a “special loss result”, a “specific small round high-probability result”, a “most advantageous” Results "and" low-probability results ".

Here, as shown in the second column of the table of FIG. 24, the “special out-of-special result” is a game result selected when the “winning / winning” has not been achieved in the win / fail lottery (symbol x in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result that is selected when “winning winning” is achieved in the winning / rejecting lottery (symbol ○ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normally out of order result” and the game state will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state and the like, the content of the game result, and The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the “special departure result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, in the “special off result”, the winning / rejecting lottery mode does not shift.
In the low probability mode “special loss result”, the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect A. In the high probability mode “special loss result”, the stop is performed. The result is a special combination of symbols, and a small hit effect instead of the effect for the open / close execution mode.

In the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which round games are performed with the upper limit being two times, and opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time manner. You. In the “explicit small round high-probability result”, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In the “specific small round high-accuracy result”, the stop result is a special combination of symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect B. In the “explicit small round high probability result”, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game time after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is the high probability mode on the display screen G.
Therefore, by confirming the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the player can grasp that the game result is “explicit small round high accuracy result”.

In the “most advantageous result” and the “low-probability result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with the upper limit being 15 times, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38 a is performed in a long time mode. Executed several times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning / rejecting lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the open / close execution mode is used. Is the effect C or the effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect C, and a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. In this case, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect D.
In the "low-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode. Become. Further, in the “most advantageous result” and the “low-probability result”, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode.

  Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect C, the game result is “the most advantageous result”. Can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode, and thereby the game result is “the most advantageous result”. And “low-probability results”. In other words, even in the case of the "most advantageous result" in the sorting lottery, if the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the symbol display device 47 displays the game result. Is disguised as if it was a "low-probability result".

  Then, in the game cycle after the end of the open / close execution mode, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is the high probability mode on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the impersonation performed as if the game result was “low-probability result”.

<About the flow after switching to the high probability mode>
FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating the right operating port, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device in a case where the success / failure result is “special loss result” after shifting to the high probability mode.
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where the winning or losing lottery is determined to be a "big hit" and the sorting lottery is assigned to an "explicit small round high-probability result" or a "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In FIG. 25, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the opened state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts a variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby achieving high-speed display. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning or losing lottery becomes “big hit prize” and is sorted to the “most advantageous result” in the sorting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L, thereby notifying the result of the success / failure lottery (FIG. 25A )reference). Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the “most advantageous result”, the open / close execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with 15 times as an upper limit, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the open / close execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest a right strike to the player, as shown in FIG.

Here, in the high frequency support mode, the player makes a right-handed operation with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and determines the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area by the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit portion is formed. Is shifted from the side to the side of the opposite side, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the right operating port 37 rather than the central operating port 36.
When a winning in the right operating port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of the game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advantageously advance the game by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball fired toward the right-handed route wins a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role opening state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a to enter the right operating port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 25A). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is required to enter the right operating port 37 over time while swinging on this plate surface. Become. In FIG. 25A, three (B1, B2) game balls are transmitted on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing operation of the right operating port in step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the closing process of the right operating port, as shown in FIG. 25B, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

The MPU 102 starts high-speed display of a plurality of symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby achieving high-speed display. The period shifts to the fluctuation period (see FIG. 25B). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a "special outlier" in the winning / rejecting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. By displaying a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment) on the activated line L, the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is notified. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and plays a game to the player by using the character line "Yayne!" Notifies that the result is a "special off result".

  In the “special departure result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number prescribed mode instead of the round number prescribed mode, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening / closing number regulation mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (two times in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on condition that the player wins the special winning opening 38a.

  Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special lottery mode stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. When reading the special display duration, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the game shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stop, a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the active line L, and the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

  Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode in step S906, the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 has a small hit. “50” is set as the start standby time (standby period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

  In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for the start of the small hit is obtained. After a lapse of about 0.2 sec, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to the open state.

  The vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in a closed state and the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, fall, and can enter the large winning opening 38a (FIG. 25 (C)). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, the player, after the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free falling, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the special winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening / closing number regulation mode is ended on the condition that a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls has won the special winning opening 38a. However, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37 over time while swinging on this plate surface. The electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls until the closed state is set based on the entry of the game balls B1 into the right operating port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simultaneously cause the plurality of remaining game balls that have been transmitted on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a to the large winning opening 38a, thereby facilitating the over-winning, so that the player can easily win the game. Attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a can hold 3 to 4 game balls until the game action is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. It is designed to be able to.

  Thereafter, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to a closed state as shown in FIG. As a result, another game ball B fired toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and then utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b. And falls toward the out port 39 (see FIG. 2), so that it is not possible to win the large winning port 38a.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a. Then, the electric accessory drive 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, The remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a are released. In addition, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the large winning opening 38a.

  In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the large winning opening 38a, and when the game balls B2 enter the predetermined game balls. Can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

  In this embodiment, since the opening / closing door 38b is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, the electric accessory 37a is set to a closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, whereby the electric accessory 37a is closed. The game ball B2 released from is free-falling and heads toward the door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily make the remaining gaming balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a enter the large winning opening 38a.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a "special loss result" without being a "big hit" in the winning / rejecting lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the big winning. The opening / closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a transmits a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in this embodiment) is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37 over time while swinging on this plate surface. is there.
According to this, after setting the open / close door 38b to the open state, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a, The electric accessory 37a is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. In the game, a larger number of game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be made to enter the large winning opening 38a, and it is possible to easily make an over-prize. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

  In the present embodiment, after the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory 37a closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece driving unit may set the guide piece to the open state, and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state based on the entering of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, and then fluctuates when 0.1 sec has elapsed. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that display may be terminated and stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. Although set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on satisfying another condition such as elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state in accordance with another condition for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. Good.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, but is located downstream of the flow path of the game ball passing through the electric accessory 37a. If it is, it does not have to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a "special loss result" without a "big hit" in the win / fail lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the big win. The opening / closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is provided with a game ball released from the electric accessory 37a. A plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held so that the number (two in this embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It is not necessary. In other words, the vertically upper plate surface of the electric accessory 37a may not be formed in a wavy shape.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b are capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist in entering the game balls into the variable winning device 38. Also functions as auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory driving unit 37b controls the electric accessory 37a. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (the open state of the electric accessory 37a) or the non-hold state (the closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory drive unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a in the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a to the non-holding state. Thus, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entry assisting means employs the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b, but other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball entry assisting means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body portion only needs to be able to hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body portion becomes larger than a predetermined number of game balls.

According to the present embodiment, the following operations and effects can be obtained.
(1) The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the large winning opening 38a, and when the game balls B2 enter the predetermined game balls. Can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) Since the opening / closing door 38b is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, the electric accessory 37a is released from the electric accessory 37a by setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. The game ball B2 falls freely and heads toward the door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily make the remaining gaming balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a enter the large winning opening 38a.
(3) After setting the open / close door 38b to the open state, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a. Since the thing 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is greater than a predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 A larger number of game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be made to enter the large winning opening 38a, and it is possible to make it easy to make over winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Second embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  In the first embodiment, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the special display continuation time and the waiting time for starting the small hit are set. When about 0.2 seconds, which is the total time, has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to the open state, and the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a changes the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. This is set so that when the game ball that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely, it reaches the special winning opening 38a after about 0.2 seconds. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a have passed through the electric accessory 37a, fall, and can enter the big winning opening 38a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the special display continuation time and the small hit start When the total time of the standby time has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to the open state and adjusts the standby time for starting the small hit. In other words, in the present embodiment, the remaining two game balls B2 that have been traveling on the plate surface of the motorized accessory 37a pass through the motorized accessory 37a, fall, and can enter the special winning opening 38a. It differs from the first embodiment in not limited.

FIG. 26 is a front view of a game board in which the vicinity of the right operating port and the variable winning device according to the second embodiment of the present invention are enlarged.
The right operating port 37 includes an electric accessory 37a and an electric accessory driving unit 37b, similarly to the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. A guardrail 371 is provided, and a passage sensor 372 provided on the right side of the guardrail 371.

  The guardrail 371 is provided on the game board 31 such that the left end thereof abuts on the upper right end of the right operating port 37 and is inclined so as to descend toward the right operating port 37. The guardrail 371 is provided on the game board 31 so as to be parallel to the electric accessory 37a. The width of the guard rail 371 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half the width of the electric accessory 37a. The guardrail 371 projects from the game board 31 toward the window panel 22 and is fixed. Therefore, a game ball flowing down from above the guardrail 371, for example, a game ball having passed through the flow path indicated by the arrow A in the drawing, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface vertically above the guardrail 371 and uses the right operating port. The ball flows down toward the out port 39 (see FIG. 2) without entering the ball 37. Here, the distance between the electric accessory 37a and the guardrail 371 is wider than one game ball. Therefore, the guardrail 371 does not obstruct the flow of the game ball flowing down the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a.

  The passage sensor 372 is a sensor that detects the passage of a game ball, and is provided on the game board 31 along the horizontal direction so as to be adjacent to the right end of the guardrail 371. The width of the passage sensor 372 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half of the electric accessory 37a. Therefore, a game ball flowing down from the vertically upper side of the passage sensor 372, for example, a game ball having passed through the flow path indicated by the arrow B in the figure, is detected by the passage sensor 372 and then vertically moved above the electric accessory 37a. It flows down along the plate surface on the side and the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b. In other words, the passage sensor 372 detects the number of gaming balls flowing down the vertically upper plate surface of the electric accessory 37a. Note that the passage sensor 372 may be any sensor as long as it can individually detect the passage of a game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like may be employed.

<Electrical Configuration of Sound Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 27 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the audio light emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 27, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage unit that does not require external power supply when storing the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a and various counter areas 94b.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b and the passage sensor 372. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100.
The MPU 92 controls driving of the various lamp units 23, 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits a command resulting from analyzing these commands to the display control device 100. Note that the sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the winning opening process, the normal process, and the game state transition process for the operating port are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the winning opening process, the normal process, and the game state transition process for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described.

<Winning process for working port>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the operating port.
In the winning opening process for the operating port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that the processing of step S206A is performed instead of the processing of step S206.

  In step S206A, the MPU 62 executes a closing process of the right operating port. In the closing process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and then, based on the entry of a game ball into the right operating port 37, the MPU 62 The accessory 37a is set to the closed state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory closing command after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state in step S206A. The electric-power closing command includes information for causing the sound emission control device 90 to recognize that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the closed state. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the electric power closing command set in step S206A to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the closed state based on the electric power closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal processing.
In the normal processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S306A instead of the processing of step S306.

  In step S306A, the MPU 62 executes a power handling support process for performing drive control of the motorized accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37. In the electric role support processing, the MPU 62 executes the electric character opening lottery based on the value of the electric character opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and executes the electric character opening lottery. When the winning is achieved, the opening and closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Specifically, when the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 controls the driving of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state. When the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state and determines that a predetermined time has elapsed without a game ball winning the right operating port 37, the MPU 62 drives the electric accessory drive 37b. The control is executed to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

Here, in the present embodiment, in a case where in the step S306A, the winning of the electric accessory opening lottery is performed, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state. After that, the electric utility release command is set. This electric-power opening command includes information for causing the sound emission control device 90 to recognize that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the open state. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the electric-power release command set in step S306A to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the open state based on the electric-compartment opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 30 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the game state transition processing.
In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes Steps S901 to S917 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 62 executes the processing of steps S907A and 908A instead of the processing of steps S907 and 908.

  In step S907A, the MPU 62 executes a setting process of a standby time for starting a small hit. In the setting process of the waiting time for the start of the small hit, the MPU 62 sets “50” as the waiting time (standby period) for the start of the small hit in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 with a probability of 50%. Is set, and "200" is set as the standby time (standby period) for the start of the small hit in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 with a probability of remaining 50%. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec or 0.4 sec. The waiting time for starting the small hit is not limited to this, and is arbitrary.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to "50" as the standby time (standby period) for starting the small hit with a probability of 50%. The timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 may be set to "50" as the waiting time (standby period) for starting the small hit with a probability different from that described above.

In step S908A, the MPU 62 sets a small hit command. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing. The small hit command includes information on the game result that triggered the shift to the open / close execution mode and information on the standby time for starting the small hit. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the small hit command set in step S908A to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the open / close execution mode based on the small hit command transmitted from the MPU 62 and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing and the effect determination processing are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the timer interrupt processing and the effect determination processing in the present embodiment will be described.

<Regarding timer interrupt processing executed by audio light emission control device 90>
FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a timer interrupt process executed by the sound emission control device.
In the timer interruption process executed by the audio light emission control device 90, the MPU 92 executes steps S2001 to S2005 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 92 performs the game ball counting process of step S2006A after executing the process of step S2001 and before executing the process of step S2002. Different from the first embodiment.

In step S2006A, the MPU 92 executes a game ball counting process. In the game ball counting process, the MPU 92 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then counts the number of game balls detected by the passage sensor 372. In other words, in the game ball counting process, the MPU 92 counts the number of game balls flowing down along the vertically upper plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.
Hereinafter, the game ball counting process will be described in detail.

<Gaming ball counting process>
FIG. 32 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the game ball counting process.
In the game ball counting process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204 as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the electric utility release command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that it has received the electric power release command, it clears in step S2202 by assigning 0 to the value of the passage counter PTC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. I do. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the game ball counting process. Here, the value of the passage counter PTC indicates the number of game balls detected by the passage sensor 372. Therefore, the MPU 92 resets and initializes the value of the passage counter PTC when the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the electric utility opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 reads the state of the passage sensor 372 in step S2203, determines the state, and determines the state as the passage detection information. It is stored in the RAM 94. Then, based on the detection result of the passage sensor 372 stored in the RAM 94, it is determined whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected.

If the MPU 92 determines that the passage of the game ball has been detected in step S2203, the MPU 92 updates the value of the passage counter PTC by adding 1 in step S2204.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines that the passage of the game ball has not been detected in step S2203, the game ball counting process ends.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 33 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the effect determination processing.
In the effect determination processing, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 92 executes the processing of steps S2114A and 2115A instead of the processing of steps S2114 and 2115, and performs the processing of step S2117A before executing the processing of step S2113. It is different from the first embodiment in that the effect at the time of closing is determined.

  In step S2114A, the MPU 92 executes a small hit effect determination process. In the process of determining the small hit effect, the MPU 92 selects the content of the small hit effect by referring to the effect table stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Specifically, in the setting process of the waiting time for the start of the small hit in the step S907A, when “50” is set as the waiting time (the waiting period) for the start of the small hit, the short waiting time effect is produced as the small hit effect. And if "200" is set as the standby time (standby period) for starting the small hit, the long wait time effect is selected as the small hit effect.

  Further, based on the selected effect content, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

  In step S2115A, the MPU 92 sets a small hit effect command including information on the short-term standby time effect or the long-term standby time effect selected in the small hit effect determination process in step S2114A. Then, the MPU 92 stores the small hit effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The small hit effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the short-term standby time effect or the long-term standby time effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on the data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, a cycle of 20 msec) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the short-term standby time effect or the long-term standby time effect.

In step S2117A, the MPU 92 executes a closing effect determination process. In the closing effect determination processing, the MPU 92 determines the closing effect to be executed when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Hereinafter, the closing effect determination processing will be described in detail.

<During closing decision process>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the closing effect determination processing.
In the closing effect determination processing, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2306 as shown in FIG.

In step S2301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the electric utility closing command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that it has received the electrical utility closing command, it determines in step S2302 whether the value of the passage counter PTC is equal to or greater than "3".

  When the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the value of the passage counter PTC is equal to or more than “3”, in step S2303, the MPU 92 executes a process of determining a high expectation effect effect. In the process of determining the high expectation effect, the MPU 92 selects the contents of the high expectation effect by referring to the effect table stored in the ROM 93 in advance.

  Further, based on the selected effect content, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

  In step S2304, the MPU 92 sets a high expectation effect command related to the high expectation effect determined in the high expectation effect determination process of step S2304. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the at-closure effect determination process. Then, the MPU 92 stores the high expectation effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This high expectation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the high expectation effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the high expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on the data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, a cycle of 20 msec) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes a high expectation effect.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the value of the pass counter PTC is not equal to or more than “3” (if it determines that the value of the pass counter PTC is less than “3”), the process proceeds to step S2305. , A low expectation effect effect determination process is executed. In the process of determining a low expectation effect, the MPU 92 selects the contents of the low expectation effect by referring to the effect table stored in the ROM 93 in advance.

  Further, based on the selected effect content, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

  In step S2306, the MPU 92 sets a low expectation effect command related to the low expectation effect determined in the low expectation effect determination process in step S2305. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the at-closure effect determination process. Then, the MPU 92 stores the low expectation effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The low expectation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the low expectation effect in the symbol display device 47 based on the low expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on the data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, a cycle of 20 msec) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes a low expectation effect.

<About the flow after switching to the high probability mode>
FIG. 35 shows that, after shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls travel on the board of the electric accessory, and the success / failure result is “special off result”, and the waiting time for starting the small hit (standby) It is a figure showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when "50" is set as (period).
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where the winning or losing lottery is determined to be a "big hit" and the sorting lottery is assigned to an "explicit small round high-probability result" or a "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In FIG. 35, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the opened state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts a variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby achieving high-speed display. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning or losing lottery becomes “big hit prize” and is sorted to the “most advantageous result” in the sorting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period. As a stop result, a symbol combination having the same numeral ("7, 7, 7" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L, thereby notifying the result of the success / failure lottery (FIG. 35 (A)). )reference). Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the “most advantageous result”, the open / close execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with 15 times as an upper limit, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the open / close execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest a right strike to the player, as shown in FIG.

Here, in the high frequency support mode, the player makes a right-handed operation with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and determines the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area by the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit portion is formed. Is shifted from the side to the side of the opposite side, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the right operating port 37 rather than the central operating port 36.
When a winning in the right operating port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of the game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advantageously advance the game by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball fired toward the right-handed route wins a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role opening state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a and enters the right operating port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 35A). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is required to enter the right operating port 37 over time while swinging on this plate surface. Become. In FIG. 35A, three (B1, B2) game balls are transmitted on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the right operating port closing execution process in step S206A based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the closing process of the right operating port, as shown in FIG. 35B, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Here, as described above, since three (B1, B2) game balls are transmitted on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the value of the passage counter PTC is "3".
Therefore, the MPU 92 executes the high expectation effect determination process of step S2303 in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the high expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and provides the player with the character line "Great attention!" It notifies that the degree of expectation of winning a prize in the large winning opening 38a is high.

  If a predetermined time has elapsed without a game ball winning in the right operating port 37, the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that no electric utility closing command has been received. The effect (high expectation effect and low expectation effect) is not executed.

The MPU 102 starts high-speed display of a plurality of symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby achieving high-speed display. The process shifts to the fluctuation period (see FIG. 35B). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a "special off result" in the winning / rejecting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. By displaying a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment) on the activated line L, the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is notified. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Also, in the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 sets “50” as the waiting time (standby period) for starting a small hit, so that the MPU 102 performs a short-term based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Perform the standby time effect. In the short-term standby time effect, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 and also displays a line of the character “I'm done!”. Further, the MPU 102 displays an image of the open special winning opening 38a on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. In this way, the short-term standby time effect notifies the player that the expectation of winning the large winning opening 38a is high.

  In the “special departure result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number prescribed mode instead of the round number prescribed mode, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening / closing number regulation mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (two times in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on condition that the player wins the special winning opening 38a.

  Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special lottery mode stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. When reading the special display duration, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the game shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stop, a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the active line L, and the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

  In addition, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode in step S906, the MPU 62 determines in step S907A that the small hit has occurred in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. “50” or “200” is set as the start standby time (standby period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the MPU 62 sets “50” as the waiting time (standby period) for small hit start, and thus the standby time for small hit start is 0.1 sec.

  In other words, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for the start of the small hit is set after the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. When about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to the open state.

  The vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in a closed state and the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, when the MPU 62 sets “50” as the waiting time (standby period) for the start of the small hit, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a are: It passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and can win the big winning opening 38a (see FIG. 35C). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, the player, after the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free falling, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the special winning opening 38a.

  Thereafter, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to a closed state as shown in FIG. As a result, another game ball B fired toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and then utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b. And falls toward the out port 39 (see FIG. 2), so that it is not possible to win the large winning port 38a.

FIG. 36 shows that, after shifting to the high-probability mode, two game balls travel along the board surface of the electric accessory, and the success / failure result is “special off result”, and the waiting time (startup time) for starting small hits It is a figure showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when "50" is set as (period).
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where the winning or losing lottery is determined to be a "big hit" and the sorting lottery is assigned to an "explicit small round high-probability result" or a "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In FIG. 36, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the opened state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts a variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby achieving high-speed display. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning or losing lottery becomes “big hit prize” and is sorted to the “most advantageous result” in the sorting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period. 36. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L, thereby notifying the result of the success / failure lottery (FIG. 36A )reference). Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the “most advantageous result”, the open / close execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with 15 times as an upper limit, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the open / close execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest a right strike to the player, as shown in FIG.

Here, in the high frequency support mode, the player makes a right-handed operation with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and determines the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area by the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit portion is formed. Is shifted from the side to the side of the opposite side, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the right operating port 37 rather than the central operating port 36.
When a winning in the right operating port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of the game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advantageously advance the game by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball fired toward the right-handed route wins a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role opening state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a to enter the right operating port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 36A). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is required to enter the right operating port 37 over time while swinging on this plate surface. Become. In FIG. 36A, two (B1, B2) game balls are transmitted on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the right operating port closing execution process in step S206A based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the closing process of the right operating port, as shown in FIG. 36B, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining one game ball B2 that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a passes through the electric accessory 37a and falls.

Here, as described above, since the number of the game balls traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is two (B1, B2), the value of the passage counter PTC is "2".
Therefore, the MPU 92 executes the low expectation effect determination processing in step S2305 in the closing effect determination processing in step S2117A.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the low expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and gives a large character to the player by using the character line “attention!”. The fact that the degree of expectation of winning in the winning opening 38a is low is notified.

The MPU 102 starts high-speed display of a plurality of symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby achieving high-speed display. The process shifts to the fluctuation period (see FIG. 36B). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case where the result of the lottery is “special out-of-spec”, the MPU 102 determines, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. By displaying a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment) on the activated line L, the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is notified. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Also, in the example of FIG. 36, the MPU 62 sets “50” as the waiting time (standby period) for starting the small hit, so that the MPU 102 Performs a standby time effect. In the short-term standby time effect, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 and also displays a line of the character “I'm done!”. Further, the MPU 102 displays an image of the open special winning opening 38a on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. In this way, the short-term standby time effect notifies the player that the expectation of winning the large winning opening 38a is high.

  In the “special departure result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number prescribed mode instead of the round number prescribed mode, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening / closing number regulation mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (two times in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on condition that the player wins the special winning opening 38a.

  Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special lottery mode stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. When reading the special display duration, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the game shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stop, a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the active line L, and the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

  In addition, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode in step S906, the MPU 62 determines in step S907A that the small hit has occurred in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. “50” or “200” is set as the start standby time (standby period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 36, since the MPU 62 sets “50” as the waiting time (standby period) for starting small hitting, the waiting time for starting small hitting is 0.1 sec.

  In other words, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for the start of the small hit is set after the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. When about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to the open state.

  The vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in a closed state and the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, when the MPU 62 sets “50” as the waiting time (standby period) for the start of the small hit, the remaining one game ball B2 that has been traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is: It passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and can enter the big winning opening 38a (see FIG. 36 (C)). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, the player, after the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free falling, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the special winning opening 38a.

  Thereafter, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to a closed state as shown in FIG. As a result, another game ball B fired toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and then utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b. And falls toward the out port 39 (see FIG. 2), so that it is not possible to win the large winning port 38a.

FIG. 37 shows that, after shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls travel on the board of the electric accessory, and the success / failure result is “special off result”, and the waiting time (startup time) for starting small hits It is a figure which shows a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when "200" is set as (period).
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where the winning or losing lottery is determined to be a "big hit" and the sorting lottery is assigned to an "explicit small round high-probability result" or a "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In FIG. 37, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the opened state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts a variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby achieving high-speed display. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning or losing lottery becomes “big hit prize” and is sorted to the “most advantageous result” in the sorting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L, thereby notifying the result of the success / failure lottery (FIG. 37 (A) )reference). Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the “most advantageous result”, the open / close execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with 15 times as an upper limit, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the open / close execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest a right strike to the player, as shown in FIG.

Here, in the high frequency support mode, the player makes a right-handed operation with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and determines the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area by the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit portion is formed. Is shifted from the side to the side of the opposite side, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the right operating port 37 rather than the central operating port 36.
When a winning in the right operating port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of the game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advantageously advance the game by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball fired toward the right-handed route wins a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role opening state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a to enter the right operating port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 37A). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is required to enter the right operating port 37 over time while swinging on this plate surface. Become. In FIG. 37 (A), three game balls (B1, B2) are traveling on the board of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the right operating port closing execution process in step S206A based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the closing process of the right operating port, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Here, as described above, since three (B1, B2) game balls are transmitted on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the value of the passage counter PTC is "3".
Therefore, the MPU 92 executes the high expectation effect determination process of step S2303 in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the high expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and provides the player with the character line "Great attention!" It notifies that the degree of expectation of winning a prize in the large winning opening 38a is high.

The MPU 102 starts high-speed display of a plurality of symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby achieving high-speed display. The process shifts to the fluctuation period (see FIG. 37B). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a "special off result" in the winning / rejecting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. By displaying a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment) on the activated line L, the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is notified. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Also, in the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 sets “200” as the standby time (standby period) for starting the small hit, so that the MPU 102 Perform the standby time effect. In the long-term standby time effect, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and also displays a line of the character "Zan-nen!" Further, the MPU 102 displays an image of the closed special winning opening 38a on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Thereby, the long standby time effect notifies the player that the degree of expectation to win the large winning opening 38a is low.

  In the “special departure result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number prescribed mode instead of the round number prescribed mode, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening / closing number regulation mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (two times in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on condition that the player wins the special winning opening 38a.

  Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special lottery mode stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. When reading the special display duration, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the game shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stop, a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the active line L, and the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

  In addition, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode in step S906, the MPU 62 determines in step S907A that the small hit has occurred in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. “50” or “200” is set as the start standby time (standby period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 37, the MPU 62 sets “200” as the standby time (standby period) for starting small hits, so that the standby time for starting small hits is 0.4 sec.

  In other words, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for the start of the small hit is set after the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. When about 0.5 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to the open state.

  The vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in a closed state and the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, when “200” is set as the waiting time (standby period) for the start of the small hit in the MPU 62, the remaining two game balls B2 that have been traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a are: It passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and cannot enter the big winning opening 38a (see FIG. 37 (C)). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, the player, after the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free falling, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the special winning opening 38a.

  Thereafter, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to the open state as shown in FIG. As a result, another game ball B fired toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and can enter the large winning opening 38a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a. Then, the electric accessory drive 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, The remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a are released.
When the MPU 62 sets “50” as the standby time (standby period) for the start of the small hit, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the gaming ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a into the large winning opening 38a. The opening / closing door 38b is set in an open state so as to make the ball enter.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 sets “200” as the standby time (standby period) for the start of the small hit, the variable winning drive unit 38c increases the size of the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a. The opening / closing door 38b is set in an open state so as not to enter the winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c includes a first opening timing that sets the opening and closing door 38b to an open state so that the gaming ball B2 released from the motorized accessory 37a enters the large winning opening 38a, A second opening timing is provided for setting the opening / closing door 38b to an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the accessory 37a does not enter the special winning opening 38a.
According to this, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to set the opening / closing door 38b to an open state so that the gaming ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the special winning opening 38a, and a first winning occasion. Since the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state at any time of the second opening timing in which the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state so as not to enter the opening 38a, the player is released from the electric accessory 37a. It will be noted whether or not the game ball B2 enters the special winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the first opening timing is such that after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the special display continuation time and The setting is made when about 0.2 sec, which is the total time of the waiting time for starting the small hit, has elapsed, but may be set when other times have elapsed. In short, the first opening time only needs to be able to set the opening / closing door 38b to the open state so that the gaming ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a can enter the large winning opening 38a.
Further, in the present embodiment, the second opening timing is such that after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the special display continuation time and Although the setting is made when about 0.5 seconds, which is the total time of the waiting time for starting the small hit, has elapsed, it may be set when other times have elapsed. In short, the second opening time only needs to be able to set the opening / closing door 38b to the open state so that the gaming ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a does not enter the large winning opening 38a.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 sets a relay period (special display) after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive 37b and the opening and closing door 38b is set to the open state by the variable winning drive 38c. A setting process (period adjusting means) for setting the waiting time for starting the small hit in step S907A for adjusting the duration and the waiting time for starting the small hit is performed.
According to this, the player sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, and then sets the open / close door 38b to the open state in the variable winning drive unit 38c during the relay period. You will pay attention. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the period adjustment unit selects one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing to adjust the relay period. However, any one of three or more timings may be used. The relay period may be adjusted by selection, or the relay period may be adjusted by setting a random time.
Further, in the present embodiment, the period adjusting means adjusts the waiting time for the start of the small hit, so that the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving section 37b, and then the variable winning driving section 38c The relay period until the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state is adjusted by, for example, the display continuation time in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47, and the vertical length of the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a. The relay period may be adjusted by adjusting the distance or the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when “50” is set as the standby time (standby period) for the start of the small hit by the MPU 62, the variable winning drive unit 38c controls the electric accessory by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state at the timing when the 37a is set to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the large winning opening 38a, and when the game balls B2 enter the predetermined game balls. Can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

  In this embodiment, since the opening / closing door 38b is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, the electric accessory 37a is set to a closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, whereby the electric accessory 37a is closed. The game ball B2 released from is free-falling and heads toward the door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily make the remaining gaming balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a enter the large winning opening 38a.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a "special loss result" without being a "big hit" in the winning / rejecting lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the big winning. The opening / closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a transmits a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in this embodiment) is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37 over time while swinging on this plate surface. is there.
According to this, after setting the open / close door 38b to the open state, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a, The electric accessory 37a is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. In the game, a larger number of game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be made to enter the large winning opening 38a, and it is possible to easily make an over-prize. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

  In the present embodiment, after the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory 37a closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece driving unit may set the guide piece to the open state, and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state based on the entering of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, and then fluctuates when 0.1 sec has elapsed. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that display may be terminated and stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. Although set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on satisfying another condition such as elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state in accordance with another condition for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. Good.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, but is located downstream of the flow path of the game ball passing through the electric accessory 37a. If it is, it does not have to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a "special loss result" without a "big hit" in the win / fail lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the big win. The opening / closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is provided with a game ball released from the electric accessory 37a. A plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held so that the number (two in this embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It is not necessary. In other words, the vertically upper plate surface of the electric accessory 37a may not be formed in a wavy shape.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b are capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist in entering the game balls into the variable winning device 38. Also functions as auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory driving unit 37b controls the electric accessory 37a. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (the open state of the electric accessory 37a) or the non-hold state (the closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory drive unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a in the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a to the non-holding state. Thus, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entry assisting means employs the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b, but other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball entry assisting means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body portion only needs to be able to hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body portion becomes larger than a predetermined number of game balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, the closing effect determination processing in step S2117A is a step of executing a predetermined effect (closing effect) when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. It functions as time production execution means.
According to this, the pachinko machine 10 includes the closed-stage effect determination process of step S2117A for executing a predetermined effect when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. For example, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, a predetermined effect is executed to determine whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player. Can be notified. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

  In the present embodiment, the high expectation effect is achieved by setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, whereby a larger number of game balls than a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) is provided. When there is a high degree of expectation that the ball will enter the special winning opening 38a (when the state becomes advantageous to the player), the function will be performed as an advantageous state notification effect that informs the player that the state will be advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the low expectation effect is achieved by setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b so that more game balls than a predetermined number enter the large winning opening 38a. When the degree of expectation to be made is low (when it is disadvantageous for the player), it functions as a disadvantageous state notification effect for notifying the player of the disadvantageous state for the player.

  According to this, the at-closure effect determination process in step S2117A is performed for the player when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b to be in an advantageous state for the player. When a high expectation effect for notifying the player of an advantageous state is executed, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player. Since the low expectation effect that informs the player that the game is disadvantageous to the player is executed, the player pays attention to the closing effect performed in the closing effect determination process in step S2117A. become.

  In the present embodiment, the closed-state effect execution means outputs information (expectation) relating to whether or not more game balls than a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) enter the large winning opening 38a. Although the information has been notified to the player, other information may be notified to the player. For example, the at-closure effect execution means may notify the player of information on whether or not the game ball can enter the special winning opening 38a. In this case, the at-closure effect execution means determines the number of the game balls traveling on the plate of the electric accessory 37a, the waiting time for the start of the small hit, the special display continuation time, and the like. May be determined to be able to make the ball into the special winning opening 38a.

According to this embodiment, substantially the same operation and effect as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and the following operation and effect can be obtained.
(4) The pachinko machine 10 is a first opening timing in which the opening and closing door 38b is set to the open state so that the gaming ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the special winning opening 38a, and the special winning opening 38a. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings in which the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state so as not to enter the ball. It will be noted whether or not the ball B2 enters the special winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) The electric accessory drive 37b releases the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state and then setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. Then, the pachinko machine 10 sets a relay period (special display) after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive section 37b and the opening and closing door 38b is set to the open state by the variable winning drive section 38c. Since the processing is provided with the setting process (period adjustment means) of the waiting time for the start of the small hit in step S907A for adjusting the duration and the waiting time for the start of the small hit, the player is required to set the electric accessory driving unit After the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state at 37b, attention is paid to the relay period until the opening and closing door 38b is set to the open state by the variable winning drive unit 38c. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the closing effect determination processing of step S2117A for executing a predetermined effect when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, for example, After the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, the player is notified by executing a predetermined effect as to whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player. can do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The closing effect determination processing in step S2117A is advantageous to the player when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b to be in an advantageous state for the player. When a high expectation effect for notifying the player of the state is executed, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, when the player becomes disadvantageous for the player, Since the low expectation effect that informs the player that the player is in a disadvantageous state is executed, the player pays attention to the closing effect performed in the closing effect determination process in step S2117A. .
(8) In the closed-stage effect determination process of step S2117A, the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, so that more game balls than a predetermined number enter the special winning opening 38a. When the degree of expectation to be made is high, a high degree of expectation effect is executed, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving part 37b, so that more game balls than a predetermined number are put into the special winning opening 38a. When the expected degree of entering the ball is low, the low expectation effect is executed, so the player pays attention to the closing effect performed in the closing effect determination process in step S2117A.

[Third embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 38 is a front view of a game board in which the vicinity of the right operating port and the variable winning device according to the third embodiment of the present invention are enlarged.
In the first embodiment, the right operating port 37 has the electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a substantially flat movable piece having a vertically upper wavy plate surface. I was
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the right operating port 37B is a guide piece (support piece) formed by a substantially flat movable piece having a vertically upper plate surface formed in a wavy shape. ), And a lower electric accessory 37a2 that is disposed vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and that is a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a substantially flat movable piece. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in having the following.

  Note that the player makes a right-handed operation with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 as the maximum, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit portion is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the right operating port 37B while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

  The upper electric accessory 37a1 is provided to be inclined so as to descend toward the right operating port 37B, and is connected to an upper electric accessory drive 37b1 mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The upper electric accessory 37a1 is set in one of a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and an open state (support state or guide state) by being driven by the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1. You. The closed state is a state in which the right operating port 37B is closed by retreating the upper electric accessory 37a1 toward the inside of the game board 31 so that the game ball does not enter the right operating port 37B. The opened state is a state in which the upper operating part 37a1 is advanced toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, so that a game ball is allowed to enter the right operating port 37B and the right operating port 37B is opened. It is.

  The lower electric accessory 37a2 is provided so as to be inclined so as to descend toward the right operating port 37B, and is connected to a lower electric accessory driving unit 37b2 mounted on the back side of the game board 31. . The lower electric accessory 37a2 is driven by the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 to be in one of a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and an open state (support state or guide state). Is set. The closed state is a state in which the lower operating part 37a2 is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31, so that the right operating port 37B is closed so that the game ball does not enter the right operating port 37B. In the opened state, the lower operating part 37a2 is advanced toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, so that the game ball is allowed to enter the right operating port 37B and the right operating port 37B is opened. State.

Here, when both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 are set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 and falls. Will be.
In addition, when the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the vertically upper plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and travels along the plate surface to the right operating port 37B. You will enter the ball. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37B with time while swinging on this plate surface. become.
In addition, when the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the open state and the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state, the game ball causes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2. Utilizing this, the ball enters the right working port 37B along this board surface. At this time, since the vertically upper plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed in a flat shape, the game ball immediately enters the right operating port 37B without taking time.
Therefore, when the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 are both set to the closed state, the game ball cannot win the right operating port 37B, and the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a1 cannot be won. When the accessory 37a2 is set to the open state, it is possible to win the right operating port 37B.
When the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to the open state or the closed state.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 39, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power supply that executes a firing control for causing the game ball firing mechanism 81 to fire game balls. And a launch control device 80. These devices are mounted on the backpack unit.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 for performing main control (main control) of a game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 for monitoring a power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may include a trace unit that leaves a trace when opened, or may have a trace structure that leaves a trace when opened. Specifically, as the trace means, a board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connection section (caulking section) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body, or a peeling-off method. At this time, a configuration may be adopted in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace that the adhesive layer has been peeled off because it remains on the bonding object is applied across the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are formed as one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but may be formed as individual chips. This is the same for MPUs of other control devices other than the main control device 60.

  The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. The output port of the MPU 62 includes an upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1 for opening and closing the upper electric accessory 37a1 of the right operating port 37B, and a lower electric actor for opening and closing the lower electric accessory 37a2 of the right operating port 37B. The object driving unit 37b2, the variable winning driving unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 are connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the winning processing for the operating port and the normal processing are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the details of the winning opening process and the normal process for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described.

<Winning process for working port>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the operating port.
In the winning opening process for the operating port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that the processing of step S206B is performed instead of the processing of step S206.

  In step S206B, the MPU 62 executes a closing process of the right operating port. In the closing process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 to make both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2. Set to closed state. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S207.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal processing.
In the normal processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 62 executes the processing for supporting the electric hand in step S306B instead of the processing in step S306.

  In step S306B, the MPU 62 executes a process for supporting electric power for executing drive control of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 provided in the right operating port 37B.

FIG. 42 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the electric role support processing.
In the process for supporting electric roles, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1307 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 executes an electric auditors product opening lottery based on the value of the electric auditors product opening counter C4 stored in the electric auditors holding area 64c of the RAM 64.

In step S1302, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning combination for opening the electric accessory has been won.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the winning combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1307.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1303 to execute the upper-side electric bonus lottery. In the upper-side electric auditors goods lottery, in the case of winning the electric-operated auditorium opening lottery, it is determined whether or not to set the upper electric auditors goods 37a1 to the open state. Specifically, in the upper-side electric auditors goods lottery, there is a 50% probability of winning, and there is a remaining 50% probability of non-winning.
In the present embodiment, in the upper-side electric auditors goods lottery, the winning is performed with a probability of 50%, but the winning may be performed with a probability different from 50%.

In step S1304, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper-side electric accessory lottery has been won.
If the MPU 62 determines in the step S1304 that the lottery has been won, the process proceeds to a step S1305. In the upper electric auditors product opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the upper electric auditors product driving unit 37b1 to set the upper electric auditors product 37a1 to the open state.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1304 that it has not been won in the upper electric auditors goods lottery, in step S1306, it executes a lower electric auditors goods opening execution process. In the lower electric auditors product opening execution processing, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the lower electric auditors product driving unit 37b2 to set the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to the open state.

After executing the processing of step S1305 or step S1306, and when it is determined in step S1302 that the winning of the electric accessory has not been won, the processing after step S1307 is executed.
In step S1307, the MPU 62 performs other processing. In other processes, for example, after setting the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, the MPU 62 determines that a predetermined time has elapsed without a game ball winning the right operating port 37B. In this case, the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 are both set to the closed state by executing the drive control of the upper electric accessory drive 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive 37b2. Further, for example, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the electric role support processing.

<About the flow after switching to the high probability mode>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when the winning / failing result becomes “special out-of-match result” and the upper electric auditors lottery is won after shifting to the high probability mode. is there.
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where the winning or losing lottery is determined to be a "big hit" and the sorting lottery is assigned to an "explicit small round high-probability result" or a "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In FIG. 43, the open state of the right operating port 37B (each electric accessory 37a1, 37a2) and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by solid lines, and the right operating port 37B (each electric accessory 37a1, 37a2) is closed. The state and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts a variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby achieving high-speed display. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning or losing lottery becomes “big hit prize” and is sorted to the “most advantageous result” in the sorting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L, thereby notifying the result of the success / failure lottery (FIG. 43 (A) )reference). Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the “most advantageous result”, the open / close execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with 15 times as an upper limit, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the open / close execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest a right strike to the player, as shown in FIG.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player makes a right-handed operation with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and determines the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area on the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. Is shifted to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37B than the central operating port 36 can be increased.
When a winning in the right operating port 37B is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advantageously advance the game by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball fired toward the right-handed route wins a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 41 is displayed. As a result corresponding to the shift to the role opening state, when the upper-side electric auditors goods lottery in step S1303 is won, as described above, the upper electric auditors goods 37a1 provided in the right operating port 37B is set to the predetermined position. In the open state.
When the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set in the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and enters the right operating port 37B along this plate surface. (See FIG. 43A). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37B with time while swinging on this plate surface. become. In FIG. 43 (A), three (B1, B2) game balls are transmitted on the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing operation of the right operating port in step S206B based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B. In the closing process of the right operating port, as shown in FIG. 43B, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1 to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 wins the power-operated-object opening lottery, and sets the upper electric-powered article 37a1 to the open state when the upper-powered accessory lottery is selected in step S1303, and thereafter, operates rightward. The upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the mouth 37B.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have been traveling on the plate surface of the upper electric auditors 'hand 37a1 pass through the upper electric auditors' hand 37a1 and fall.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the fluctuation display of the columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), a transition is made to the high-speed fluctuation period (see FIG. 43B). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case where the result of the lottery is “special deviation result”, the MPU 102 determines, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. By displaying a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment) on the activated line L, the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is notified. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and plays a game to the player by using the character line "Yayne!" Notifies that the result is a "special off result".

  In the “special departure result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number prescribed mode instead of the round number prescribed mode, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening / closing number regulation mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (two times in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on condition that the player wins the special winning opening 38a.

  Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special lottery mode stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. When reading the special display duration, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the game shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stop, a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the active line L, and the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

  Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode in step S906, the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 has a small hit. “50” is set as the start standby time (standby period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

  In other words, after the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the total of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for starting small hits When about 0.2 seconds have elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to the open state.

  In addition, the vertical distance between the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the special winning opening 38a is approximately the same as when the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to a closed state and the game ball that has been traveling on the plate surface of the upper electric auditorium 37a1 falls freely. It is set to reach the special winning opening 38a after 0.2 seconds. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 that have passed along the plate surface of the upper electric auditors 'hand 37a1 pass through the upper electric auditors' hand 37a1, fall, and can enter the big winning opening 38a. (See FIG. 43 (C)). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, the player, after the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free falling, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the special winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening / closing number regulation mode is ended on the condition that a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls has won the special winning opening 38a. However, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is required to enter the right operating port 37B over time while swinging on this plate surface. That is, the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls until the game ball B1 enters the right operating port 37B and is set to the closed state based on the ball entry. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simultaneously cause the plurality of remaining game balls, which have been transmitted along the plate surface of the upper electric role-playing object 37a1, to the large winning opening 38a, thereby making it easy for the player to over-win. Attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1 holds 3 to 4 game balls until the game ball B1 enters the right operating port 37B and is set to the closed state based on the ball entry. It is designed to be able to.

  Thereafter, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to a closed state as shown in FIG. 43 (D). As a result, another game ball B fired toward the right-handed route passes through the upper electric accessory 37a1, falls, and utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b. Since it falls along the surface toward the out opening 39 (see FIG. 2), it is impossible to win the large winning opening 38a.

FIG. 44 shows a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device in a case where the winning / failing result is “special out-of-match result” after shifting to the high-probability mode and the upper-side electric auditory product lottery is not won. FIG.
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where the winning or losing lottery is determined to be a "big hit" and the sorting lottery is assigned to an "explicit small round high-probability result" or a "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In FIG. 44, the open state of the right operating port 37B (each electric accessory 37a1, 37a2) and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by solid lines, and the right operating port 37B (each electric accessory 37a1, 37a2) is closed. The state and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts a variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby achieving high-speed display. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning or losing lottery becomes “big hit prize” and is sorted to the “most advantageous result” in the sorting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L, thereby notifying the result of the success / failure lottery (FIG. 44A )reference). Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the “most advantageous result”, the open / close execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with 15 times as an upper limit, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the open / close execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest a right-hand to the player, as shown in FIG.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player makes a right-handed operation with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and determines the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area on the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. Is shifted to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37B than the central operating port 36 can be increased.
When a winning in the right operating port 37B is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advantageously advance the game by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball fired toward the right-handed route wins a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 41 is displayed. If it is a result corresponding to the shift to the role opening state and the upper electric role drawing in step S1303 is not won, as described above, the lower electric role 37a2 provided in the right operating port 37B. Are opened in a predetermined manner.
When the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set in the open state, the game ball utilizes the inclination of the vertically upper plate surface of the lower electric auditors product 37a2 and travels along the plate surface to the right operating port 37B. The ball will be entered (see FIG. 44 (A)). At this time, since the vertically upper plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed in a flat shape, the game ball immediately enters the right operating port 37B without taking time. In FIG. 44A, two (B1, B2) game balls are transmitted on the plate surface of the lower electric auditors product 37a2.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing operation of the right operating port in step S206B based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B. In the closing process of the right operating port, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 to set the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state. . In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 wins the electric-power-operated-object opening lottery, and if the upper-power-operated-object lottery in step S1303 is not elected, sets the lower electric-powered article 37a2 to the open state. Then, the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B.
Therefore, the remaining one game ball B2 that has traveled along the plate surface of the lower electric auditors product 37a2 passes through the lower electric auditors product 37a2 and falls.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the fluctuation display of the columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), a transition is made to the high-speed fluctuation period (see FIG. 44B). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case where the result of the lottery is “special deviation result”, the MPU 102 determines, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. By displaying a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment) on the activated line L, the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is notified. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and plays a game to the player by using the character line "Yayne!" Notifies that the result is a "special off result".

  In the “special departure result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number prescribed mode instead of the round number prescribed mode, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening / closing number regulation mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (two times in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on condition that the player wins the special winning opening 38a.

  Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special lottery mode stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. When reading the special display duration, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the game shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stop, a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the active line L, and the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

  Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode in step S906, the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 has a small hit. “50” is set as the start standby time (standby period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

  In other words, after the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the special display continuation time and the waiting time for the start of the small hit are set. When the total time of about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to the open state.

  In addition, the vertical distance between the lower electric auditors' hand 37a2 and the special winning opening 38a is such that the lower electric auditors' hand 37a2 is set in a closed state, and the game ball that has traveled along the plate surface of the lower electric auditors' hand 37a2 falls freely. In this case, it is set to reach the special winning opening 38a after about 0.2 seconds. In other words, the remaining one game ball B2 that has traveled on the plate surface of the lower electric auditors 'hand 37a2 passes through the lower electric auditors' hand 37a2, falls, and can enter the special winning opening 38a. (See FIG. 44C). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, the player, after the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free falling, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the special winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening / closing number regulation mode is ended on the condition that a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls has won the special winning opening 38a. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed in a flat shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37B immediately without taking time, and It is difficult for the electric accessory 37a2 to hold a plurality of game balls until the electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game balls B1 into the right operating port 37B. In other words, the lower electric combination 37a2 is less likely to be over-prized than the upper electric combination 37a1.
In the present embodiment, the lower electric accessory 37a2 holds one or two game balls until the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game balls B1 into the right operating port 37B. Designed to be able to.

  Thereafter, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to a closed state as shown in FIG. As a result, another game ball B fired toward the right-handed route passes through the lower electric accessory 37a2, falls, and then utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b. Since it falls along the plate surface toward the out opening 39 (see FIG. 2), it is impossible to win the big winning opening 38a.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the upper electric auditors 'hand 37a1 and the lower electric auditors' hand 37a2. Then, after setting the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state, the upper electric auditors drive 37b1 sets the upper electric auditors 37a1 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B. As a result, the remaining gaming balls B2 held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 are released, and the lower electric auditors drive 37b2 sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then sets the right operating port. By setting the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the 37B, the remaining game balls B2 held by the lower electric accessory 37a2 are released. Further, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the upper electric auditorium 37a1 enters the large winning opening 38a, and is released from the lower electric auditorium 37a2. The opening and closing door 38b is set in an open state so that the game ball B2 that has been thrown into the special winning opening 38a.

  In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state by the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1. In addition, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the open state in accordance with the timing when the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state by the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B2 held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to enter the large winning opening 38a. A predetermined game ball can be paid out when entering the ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower electric accessory 37a2 has a vertically upper plate surface formed in a planar shape, and a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. The upper electric accessory 37a1 has a vertically upper plate surface formed in a wavy shape, can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and has a larger number than the lower electric accessory 37a2. It functions as a second guide piece capable of holding a game ball.
In the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2 by forming a vertically upper plate surface into a wavy shape. The plate surface on the vertically upper side may be formed in a planar shape, and a surface processing may be performed so as to prevent the game balls from slipping, so that a larger number of game balls can be held than the lower electric accessory 37a2. In short, the second guide piece only needs to be able to hold more game balls than the first guide piece.

  In the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving unit 37b2 set the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then enter the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B. A first opening / closing state in which the lower electric role 37a2 is set to the closed state based on the ball to release the remaining game balls B2 held by the lower electric role 37a2, and an upper electric role After the 37a1 is set to the open state, the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, so that the upper electric accessory 37a1 retains the remaining. And a second open / close state of releasing the game ball B2.

According to this, the pachinko machine 10 sets the first opening / closing state of opening / closing the lower electric role-playing object 37a2 capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. The upper open / close state is set to any of the second open / close states for opening / closing the upper electric accessory 37a1 capable of holding more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2. By setting, a larger number of game balls can enter the special winning opening 38a as compared with the case where the first open / close state is set. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the upper electric accessory 37a1 opens and closes, so that the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive 37b1 sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state or the closed state, and the lower electric accessory drive 37b2 sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state. Alternatively, although the closed state is set, the opening and closing of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set by one drive unit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the process of step S1301 functions as a guide piece lottery unit that executes a lottery to determine whether or not to set the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to the open state. Then, the electric support process of step S306B is performed by setting one of the first opening / closing state and the second opening / closing state based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means. 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 function as holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount by which game balls are held.

According to this, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the electric power support processing in step S306B for adjusting the amount of game balls held, the pachinko machine 10 determines the amount of game balls held in the electric hand support processing in step S306B. By making adjustments to increase the number, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to enter the special winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In addition, according to this, the electric power support processing of step S306B adjusts the amount of holding the game ball in the upper electric auditors 'hand 37a1 and the lower electric auditors' hand 37a2 based on the lottery result of the processing of step S1301. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the processing in step S1301. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

  In the present embodiment, the holding amount adjusting means sets the upper electric accessory to one of the first open / close state and the second open / close state based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means. The holding amount of the game ball is adjusted by the 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2. On the other hand, the holding amount adjusting means alternately sets the first open / closed state and the second open / closed state based on, for example, the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means, so that the upper electric accessory 37a1 and The amount of holding the game ball by the lower electric auditors product 37a2 may be adjusted.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the holding amount adjusting means sets the game device to one of the first opening / closing state and the second opening / closing state, so that the upper electric combination 37a1 and the lower electric combination 37a2 play a game. The amount of holding the ball was adjusted. On the other hand, the holding amount adjusting means may adjust the amount of holding the game ball by the guide piece, for example, by configuring the guide piece so that the amount of holding the game ball can be changed. Good. In short, the holding amount adjusting means only needs to be able to adjust the amount by which the guide ball holds the game ball.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b is located vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2, so that the upper electric accessory drive 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive 37b2 are connected to each other. By setting both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state, the game ball B2 released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 falls freely and opens and closes. 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily make the remaining game balls B2 held by the upper electric auditors 'hand 37a1 or the lower electric auditors' hand 37a2 enter the special winning opening 38a.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a "special loss result" without being a "big hit" in the winning / rejecting lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the big winning. The opening / closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. The upper electric accessory 37a1 has a plurality of games flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 (two in this embodiment) is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. The ball can be held. Since the plate surface on the vertical upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37B over time while swinging on this plate surface. It is.
According to this, after setting the open / close door 38b to the open state, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a, The upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B2 released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the pachinko machine is provided. The machine 10 can cause more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls to enter the large winning opening 38a, and can easily make an over-prize. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

  In the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive 37b2 set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 in the open state, and then move to the right operating port 37B. The upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state based on the entering of the game ball B1, but the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a1 is set based on the entering of two or more game balls. The lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to a closed state. In short, the guide piece driving unit may set the guide piece to the open state, and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, and then sets 0. It is sufficient that the variable display is terminated and the stop display is performed when .1 sec has elapsed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then move to the right operating port 37B. The upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1. However, other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time are satisfied. , The upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to the closed state. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 in the closed state by the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2. The opening and closing door 38b may be set to the open state in accordance with the timing according to the conditions.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the upper electric auditors 'handpiece 37a1 and the lower electric auditors' handpiece 37a2. As long as it is located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the object 37a2, it does not need to be located vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a "special loss result" without a "big hit" in the win / fail lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the big win. The opening / closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls entering the mouth 38a, and the upper electric accessory 37a1 is released from the upper electric accessory 37a1. A plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held so that the number of balls (two in this embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 becomes larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It does not have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 may not be formed in a wavy shape.

In the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1, the lower electric accessory 37a2, the upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1, and the lower electric accessory driving unit 37b2 hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. It is possible to function as a ball entry assisting device for assisting entry of game balls into the variable winning device 38. In this case, the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 function as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the upper electric accessory drive The portion 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving unit 37b2 drive the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to maintain the holding state (the open state of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2). Alternatively, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that is set to the non-holding state (the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 are closed).
The electric accessory drive unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the holding state, and By setting both the object 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 in a non-holding state, the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 is held so as not to interfere with a game ball flowing down the game area. Released game ball B2.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entry assisting means employs the upper electric accessory 37a1, the lower electric accessory 37a2, the upper electric accessory drive 37b1, and the lower electric accessory drive 37b2. Other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball entry assisting means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body portion only needs to be able to hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body portion becomes larger than a predetermined number of game balls.

According to this embodiment, substantially the same operation and effect as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and the following operation and effect can be obtained.
(9) The pachinko machine 10 is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, a first open / close state of opening and closing the lower electric accessory 37a2 capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. Since the upper electric accessory 37a1 that can hold more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to one of the second open / close states in which the upper electric accessory 37a1 is opened / closed, the second open / close state is set. This allows a larger number of game balls to enter the special winning opening 38a as compared to the case where the first opening / closing state is set. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the upper electric accessory 37a1 opens and closes, so that the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(10) The upper electric accessory drive 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive 37b2 set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and thereafter, the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory. By setting the accessory 37a2 to the closed state, the game balls held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 are released, and the pachinko machine 10 adjusts the amount of holding the game balls. Since the electronic support process of step S306B is provided, by adjusting the amount of game balls to be held in the electronic support process of step S306B to be large, the game balls are inserted into the special winning opening 38a. Can be made easier. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(11) The electric power support processing of step S306B adjusts the amount of holding the game balls by the upper electric auditors 'hand 37a1 and the lower electric auditors' hand 37a2 based on the lottery result of the processing of step S1301. The player pays attention to the lottery result of the processing in step S1301. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Fourth embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 45 is a front view of a game board in which the vicinity of a right operating port and a variable winning device according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention are enlarged.
In the first embodiment, the right operating port 37 has the electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a substantially flat movable piece having a vertically upper wavy plate surface. I was
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the right operating port 37C has an electric accessory 37a3 as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a substantially flat movable piece. This is different from the first embodiment in the point.

In the present embodiment, the game board 31 is disposed vertically above the electric accessory 37a3 at a distance of about one game ball, and the plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape. It differs from the first embodiment in that it has a plate 50 constituted by a flat movable piece.
In addition, the player strikes the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 as the maximum, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit portion is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the right operating port 37C while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

  The electric accessory 37a3 is provided to be inclined so as to descend toward the right operating port 37C, and is connected to an electric accessory drive 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a3 is set in one of a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and an open state (support state or guide state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the right operating port 37C is closed by retreating the electric accessory 37a3 toward the inside of the game board 31 so that the game ball does not enter the right operating port 37C. The open state is a state in which the right operating port 37C is opened by advancing the electric accessory 37a3 toward the window panel 22 and projecting it from the game board 31 so that a game ball can enter the right operating port 37C. is there.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the electric accessory 37a3 and falls.
When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 and enters the right operating port 37C along the plate surface. Will do. At this time, since the vertically upper plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed in a flat shape, the game ball immediately enters the right operating port 37C without taking time.
Therefore, when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the right operating port 37C, and when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the right operating port 37C is not set. You can win.

  The plate 50 is provided so that a vertically lower plate surface is parallel to a horizontal plane, and is connected to a plate drive unit 50 a mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The plate 50 is driven by the plate driving unit 50a, so that the plate 50 vibrates in a simple manner by repeating the forward and backward states. The advancing state is a state in which the plate 50 is advanced toward the window panel 22 so as to protrude from the game board 31, thereby holding a game ball flowing down the game area. Here, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the plate 50 is formed in a wavy shape, so that the plate 50 can hold the game ball without falling. The retreat state is a state in which the plate 50 is retreated toward the inside of the game board 31 so as not to interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. In the present embodiment, the period of the simple vibration of the plate 50 is set to 2 sec. In the present embodiment, the plate 50 is designed so as to be able to hold 3 to 4 game balls while in the forward state.

<Electrical Configuration of Sound Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 46, the sound light emission control device 90 includes a sound light emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound light emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage unit that does not require external power supply when storing the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to a plate driving unit 50a that opens and closes the plate 50.
The MPU 92 controls driving of the various lamp units 23, 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits a command resulting from analyzing these commands to the display control device 100. Note that the sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

<About the flow after switching to the high probability mode>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when a winning or losing result is “special off result” after a transition to the high probability mode and a game ball is won in the big winning opening. It is.
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where the winning or losing lottery is determined to be a "big hit" and the sorting lottery is assigned to an "explicit small round high-probability result" or a "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In FIG. 47, the open state of the right operating port 37C and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37C and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts a variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby achieving high-speed display. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning or losing lottery becomes “big hit prize” and is sorted to the “most advantageous result” in the sorting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period. As a stop result, a symbol combination having the same numeral ("7, 7, 7" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L, thereby notifying the result of the winning / rejecting lottery (FIG. 47A )reference). Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the “most advantageous result”, the open / close execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with 15 times as an upper limit, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the open / close execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in order to suggest a right strike to the player, as shown in FIG.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player makes a right-handed operation with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and determines the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area on the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. Is shifted from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37C than the central operating port 36 can be increased.
When a winning in the right operating port 37C is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of the game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advantageously advance the game by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball fired toward the right-handed route flows down the game area and is held by the plate 50 in the forward state. FIG. 47A illustrates a state where three game balls are held by the plate 50.
As described above, since the plate 50 is oscillating in a simple manner, the plate 50 is in the forward state and then in the backward state. Since the plate 50 does not interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area by being in the retreat state, the game ball held by the plate 50 falls as shown in FIG. 47 (B). Will be done.

The game ball fired toward the right-handed route wins a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31 before being held by the plate 50, and wins the through gate 41. In the case where the result of the internal lottery performed based on the above is a result corresponding to the shift to the electric utility opening state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a3 provided in the right operating port 37C is set to the predetermined position. It becomes an open state in an aspect.
When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3, and enters the right operating port 37C along this plate surface. (See FIG. 47B). At this time, since the vertically upper plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed in a flat shape, the game ball immediately enters the right operating port 37C without taking time. In FIG. 47B, three (B1, B2) game balls are traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3. These three game balls are game balls that have dropped from the plate 50.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing operation of the right operating port in step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. In the closing process of the right operating port, as shown in FIG. 47C, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and thereafter, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. The electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 pass through the electric accessory 37a3 and fall.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the fluctuation display of the columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), a transition is made to the high-speed fluctuation period (see FIG. 47C). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a “special off result” in the winning / rejecting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. By displaying a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment) on the activated line L, the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is notified. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and plays a game to the player by using the character line "Yayne!" Notifies that the result is a "special off result".

  In the “special departure result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number prescribed mode instead of the round number prescribed mode, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening / closing number regulation mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (two times in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on condition that the player wins the special winning opening 38a.

  Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special lottery mode stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. When reading the special display duration, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C, the process shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stop, a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the active line L, and the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

  Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode in step S906, the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 has a small hit. “50” is set as the start standby time (standby period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

  In other words, after the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for the start of the small hit is performed. When about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to the open state.

  The vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a3 and the special winning opening 38a is about 0.2 seconds when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state and the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 falls freely. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the board of the electric accessory 37a3 pass through the electric accessory 37a3, fall and can enter the large winning opening 38a (FIG. 47 (D)). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a3 and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, the player, after the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3, starts free fall, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the special winning opening 38a.

FIG. 48 shows the right operating port, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the winning / failing result is “special loss result” after the mode is shifted to the high probability mode and the gaming ball does not win the large winning opening. FIG.
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where the winning or losing lottery is determined to be a "big hit" and the sorting lottery is assigned to an "explicit small round high-probability result" or a "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In FIG. 48, the open state of the right operating port 37C and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37C and the opened state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts a variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby achieving high-speed display. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning or losing lottery becomes “big hit prize” and is sorted to the “most advantageous result” in the sorting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L, thereby notifying the result of the success / failure lottery (FIG. 48 (A)). )reference). Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the “most advantageous result”, the open / close execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with 15 times as an upper limit, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the open / close execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest a right strike to the player, as shown in FIG.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player makes a right-handed operation with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and determines the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area on the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. Is shifted from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37C than the central operating port 36 can be increased.
When a winning in the right operating port 37C is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of the game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advantageously advance the game by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball fired toward the right-handed route flows down the game area and is held by the plate 50 in the forward state. FIG. 48A illustrates a state in which one game ball is held by the plate 50.
As described above, since the plate 50 is oscillating in a simple manner, the plate 50 is in the forward state and then in the backward state. Since the plate 50 does not interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area by being in the retreat state, the game ball held by the plate 50 falls as shown in FIG. Will be done.

The game ball fired toward the right-handed route wins a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31 before being held by the plate 50, and wins the through gate 41. In the case where the result of the internal lottery performed based on the above is a result corresponding to the shift to the electric utility opening state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a3 provided in the right operating port 37C is set to the predetermined position. It becomes an open state in an aspect.
When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 to enter the right operating port 37C along this plate surface. (See FIG. 48B). At this time, since the vertically upper plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed in a flat shape, the game ball immediately enters the right operating port 37C without taking time. In FIG. 48 (B), the number of game balls traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 is one (B1). This one game ball B1 is a game ball dropped from the plate 50.

  In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing operation of the right operating port in step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. In the closing process of the right operating port, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and thereafter, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. The electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state.

Also, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the variable display of the columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the period shifts to the high-speed variable period (see FIG. 48C). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a “special off result” in the winning / rejecting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. By displaying a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment) on the activated line L, the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is notified. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and plays a game to the player by using the character line "Yayne!" Notifies that the result is a "special off result".

  In the “special departure result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number prescribed mode instead of the round number prescribed mode, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening / closing number regulation mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (two times in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on condition that the player wins the special winning opening 38a.

  Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special lottery mode stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. When reading the special display duration, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C, the process shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stop, a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the active line L, and the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

  Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode in step S906, the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 has a small hit. “50” is set as the start standby time (standby period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

  In other words, after the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for the start of the small hit is performed. When about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to the open state.

  The vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a3 and the special winning opening 38a is about 0.2 seconds when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state and the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 falls freely. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining game balls that have traveled along the plate of the electric auditors 'hand 37a3 pass through the electric auditors' hand 37a3, fall, and can enter the special winning opening 38a. According to this, since the electric accessory 37a3 and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, the player, after the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3, starts free fall, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the special winning opening 38a. However, in the example of FIG. 47, there is no game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 37a3 and has fallen, so that the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 38a (see FIG. 48D).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a3. Then, the electric accessory drive 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state, and then sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. The remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 are released. In addition, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening and closing door 38b to an open state so that the gaming ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a3 enters the large winning opening 38a.

  In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state in accordance with the timing when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 to enter the special winning opening 38a, and when the game balls B2 enter the predetermined game balls. Can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the opening / closing door 38b is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a3, the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, whereby the electric accessory 37a3 is set. The game ball B2 released from is free-falling and heads toward the door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily make the remaining gaming balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 enter the large winning opening 38a.

  In the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a3 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a3 may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece driving unit may set the guide piece to the open state, and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state based on the entering of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state and then changes when 0.1 sec has elapsed. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that display may be terminated and stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a3 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. Although set, the electric accessory 37a3 may be set to the closed state based on satisfying another condition such as elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the open state in accordance with the timing according to another condition for setting the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. Good.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a3, but is located downstream of the flow path of the game ball passing through the electric accessory 37a3. If it is, it does not need to be located vertically below the electric accessory 37a3.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a3 and the electric accessory driving unit 37b are capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist in entering the game balls into the variable winning device 38. Also functions as auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a3 functions as an auxiliary main body located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory driving unit 37b controls the electric accessory 37a3. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (the open state of the electric accessory 37a3) or the non-hold state (the closed state of the electric accessory 37a3).
Then, the electric accessory drive unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a3 to the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the non-hold state. Thus, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entry assisting means employs the electric accessory 37a3 and the electric accessory driving unit 37b. However, other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball entry assisting means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body portion only needs to be able to hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body portion becomes larger than a predetermined number of game balls.

In the present embodiment, the plate 50 and the plate driving unit 50a function as a holding unit that can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. Specifically, the plate 50 functions as a holding main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a3, and the plate driving unit 50a drives the plate 50, It functions as a holding drive unit that sets the holding state or the non-holding state. The plate driving unit 50a holds the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the plate 50 to the holding state, and sets the plate 50 to the non-holding state, thereby setting the plate 50 to the non-holding state. The game ball held by the plate 50 is released so as not to interfere with the ball.
According to this, the plate 50 and the plate driving unit 50a can surely hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the electric accessory 37a3.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the plate driving unit 50a is set to drive the plate 50 so that the holding state and the non-holding state are repeated to make a simple vibration. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the plate 50 and the plate driving unit 50a.

  In the present embodiment, the plate 50 is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a3. It does not have to be located on the upstream side. In short, the variable winning device only needs to include the opening / closing door located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball passing through the holding main body.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a "special loss result" without being a "big hit" in the winning / rejecting lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the big winning. The opening / closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. The plate 50 flows down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 (excluding the number of game balls entering the right operating port 37C) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Game balls can be held. The plate 50 is provided so that the vertically lower plate surface is parallel to the horizontal plane, and the vertically upper plate surface is formed in a wavy shape. This is because it is held without falling.
According to this, after setting the open / close door 38b to the open state, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a, Since the plate 50 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 becomes larger than a predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 has a special winning opening. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can easily enter the ball 38a, and over-winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the present embodiment, substantially the same functions and effects as (1) and (2) in the first embodiment can be obtained, and the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(12) The plate driving unit 50a holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the plate 50 to the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the plate 50 to the non-holding state. The game balls held by the plate 50 are released so as not to interfere with the game balls. According to this, the plate 50 and the plate driving unit 50a can surely hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the electric accessory 37a3.

(13) Since the plate driving unit 50a drives the plate 50 so as to repeat the holding state and the non-holding state so as to make a simple vibration, the pachinko machine 10 sets the plate 50 and the plate driving unit 50a. The configuration can be simplified.
(14) After setting the open / close door 38b to the open state, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a, and sets the plate 50 Can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to make it easier for more game balls to enter than a predetermined number of game balls, and to make it easier to over-win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

In the first embodiment, all the remaining game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a can pass through the electric accessory 37a, fall, and enter the large winning opening 38a. .
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, all the remaining game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the motorized accessory 37a pass through the motorized accessory 37a, fall, and can enter the large winning opening 38a. It differs from the first embodiment in not limited.

FIG. 49 is a front view of a game board in which the vicinity of a right operating port and a variable winning device according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention are enlarged.
The right operating port 37 is provided with an electric accessory 37a and an electric accessory driving unit 37b, similarly to the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 49, vertically above the electric accessory 37a. A guardrail 371 is provided, and a general winning opening 35D is provided vertically below the electric accessory 37a. Note that, in the present embodiment, the right operating port 37 and the electric accessory 37a are provided at positions vertically offset upward from the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the cover 381 is formed in a shape corresponding to the offset of the right operating port 37 and the electric accessory 37a.

  The guardrail 371 is provided on the game board 31 such that the left end thereof abuts on the upper right end of the right operating port 37 and is inclined so as to descend toward the right operating port 37. The guardrail 371 is provided on the game board 31 so as to be parallel to the electric accessory 37a. The width of the guard rail 371 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half the width of the electric accessory 37a. The guardrail 371 projects from the game board 31 toward the window panel 22 and is fixed. Therefore, a game ball flowing down from above the guardrail 371, for example, a game ball having passed through the flow path indicated by the arrow A in the drawing, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface vertically above the guardrail 371 and uses the right operating port. The ball flows down toward the out port 39 (see FIG. 2) without entering the ball 37. Further, a game ball flowing down from the right side of the guardrail 371, for example, a game ball flowing through the flow path indicated by the arrow B in the figure, a plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a or a vertically upward side of the opening / closing door 38b. It will flow down along the board surface of this. Here, the distance between the electric accessory 37a and the guardrail 371 is wider than one game ball. Therefore, the guardrail 371 does not obstruct the flow of the game ball flowing down the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a.

  The general winning opening 35D is provided in the game board 31 so as to be located vertically below the guardrail 371. In other words, the general winning opening 35D reaches directly below the guardrail 371 (the left half of the plate surface of the electric auditors character 37a) among the game balls flowing down the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric auditors character 37a. The game ball is provided at a position where the ball is entered by setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. In addition, among the game balls flowing down the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, the game balls reaching the right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a set the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. As a result, it falls toward the opening and closing door 38b of the special winning opening 38a, avoiding the general winning opening 35D.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes payout of ten prize balls when a ball enters the general winning opening 35, and a ball enters the variable prize device 38. In this case, 15 payout balls were paid out.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes the payout of 15 prize balls when the ball enters the general winning openings 35 and 35D, and enters the variable winning device 38. Is different from that of the first embodiment in that payout of 10 prize balls is executed in the case of occurrence.

<About the flow after switching to the high probability mode>
FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating the right operating port, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device in a case where the success / failure result is “special loss result” after the shift to the high probability mode.
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where the winning or losing lottery is determined to be a "big hit" and the sorting lottery is assigned to an "explicit small round high-probability result" or a "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In FIG. 50, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the opened state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts a variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby achieving high-speed display. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning or losing lottery becomes “big hit prize” and is sorted to the “most advantageous result” in the sorting lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L, thereby notifying the result of the success / failure lottery (FIG. 50 (A) )reference). Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the “most advantageous result”, the open / close execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with 15 times as an upper limit, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the open / close execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest a right strike to the player, as shown in FIG.

Here, in the high frequency support mode, the player makes a right-handed operation with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and determines the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area by the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit portion is formed. Is shifted from the side to the side of the opposite side, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the right operating port 37 rather than the central operating port 36.
When a winning in the right operating port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of the game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advantageously advance the game by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball fired toward the right-handed route wins a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role opening state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a and enters the right operating port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 50A). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is required to enter the right operating port 37 over time while swinging on this plate surface. Become. In FIG. 50 (A), three game balls (B1, B21, B22) are traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing operation of the right operating port in step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the closing process of the right operating port, as shown in FIG. 50B, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Accordingly, the remaining two game balls B21 and B22 that have been traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

The MPU 102 starts high-speed display of a plurality of symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby achieving high-speed display. The process shifts to the fluctuation period (see FIG. 50B). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the result of the lottery is “special deviation result”, the MPU 102 determines, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. By displaying a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment) on the activated line L, the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is notified. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and plays a game to the player by using the character line "Yayne!" Notifies that the result is a "special off result".

  In the “special departure result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number prescribed mode instead of the round number prescribed mode, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening / closing number regulation mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (two times in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on condition that the player wins the special winning opening 38a.

  Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special lottery mode stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. When reading the special display duration, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the game shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stop, a special symbol combination ("3.4.1" in the present embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the active line L, and the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

  Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode in step S906, the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 has a small hit. “50” is set as the start standby time (standby period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

  In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for the start of the small hit is obtained. After a lapse of about 0.2 sec, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to the open state.

  The vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in a closed state and the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B21 and B22 that have traveled along the plate surface of the motorized accessory 37a pass through the motorized accessory 37a, fall, and can enter the large winning opening 38a. (See FIG. 50C). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, the player, after the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free falling, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the special winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, of the game balls B21 and B22 flowing down the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, the game ball B21 reaching the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is By setting the motorized accessory 37a in the closed state, the ball will enter the general winning opening 35D. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes payout of 15 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning opening 35, 35D.
On the other hand, among the game balls B21 and B22 flowing down the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, the game ball B22 reaching the right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is the electric accessory. By setting the 37a in the closed state, the player enters the special winning opening 38a while avoiding the general winning opening 35D. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes payout of ten prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize device 38.

  Thereafter, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to a closed state as shown in FIG. As a result, another game ball B fired toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and then utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b. And falls toward the out port 39 (see FIG. 2), so that it is not possible to win the large winning port 38a.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a. Then, the electric accessory drive 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, The remaining game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a are released. In addition, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to an open state so that the gaming balls B21 and B22 released from the electric accessory 37a enter the special winning opening 38a.

  In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining gaming balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the special winning opening 38a, and when entering the gaming balls B21 and B22. A predetermined game ball can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

  In this embodiment, since the opening / closing door 38b is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, the electric accessory 37a is set to a closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, whereby the electric accessory 37a is closed. The game balls B21 and B22 released from are free-fall and head toward the door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily make the remaining game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a enter the special winning opening 38a.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a "special loss result" without being a "big hit" in the winning / rejecting lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the big winning. The opening / closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a transmits a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in this embodiment) is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37 over time while swinging on this plate surface. is there.
According to this, after setting the open / close door 38b to the open state, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a, The electric accessory 37a is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B21 and B22 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. The machine 10 can cause more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls to enter the large winning opening 38a, and can easily make an over-prize. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

  In the present embodiment, after the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory 37a closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece driving unit may set the guide piece to the open state, and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state based on the entering of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, and then fluctuates when 0.1 sec has elapsed. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that display may be terminated and stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. Although set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on satisfying another condition such as elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state in accordance with another condition for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. Good.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, but is located downstream of the flow path of the game ball passing through the electric accessory 37a. If it is, it does not have to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a "special loss result" without a "big hit" in the win / fail lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the big win. The opening / closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is provided with a game ball released from the electric accessory 37a. A plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held so that the number (two in this embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It is not necessary. In other words, the vertically upper plate surface of the electric accessory 37a may not be formed in a wavy shape.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b are capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist in entering the game balls into the variable winning device 38. Also functions as auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory driving unit 37b controls the electric accessory 37a. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (the open state of the electric accessory 37a) or the non-hold state (the closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
The electric accessory drive 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1, B21, and B22 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a in the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a in the non-holding state. By setting, the game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a are released so as not to interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entry assisting means employs the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b, but other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball entry assisting means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body portion only needs to be able to hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body portion becomes larger than a predetermined number of game balls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the remaining electric balls are released by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, the electric accessory 37a is moved to the advantageous side holding position (the electric accessory 37a of the electric accessory 37a). A left half of the plate surface) and an unfavorable holding position (electrically operated accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageously held position when the remaining playing balls are released by the electrically powered accessory driving unit 37b. (Right half of the plate surface). Specifically, the advantageous side holding position is advantageous to the player by allowing a predetermined number (15 in the present embodiment) of game balls to be paid out to the general winning opening 35D for paying out the game balls. The disadvantageous side holding position is guided to the path, and by entering the game ball into the special winning opening 38a for paying out a smaller number (10 in the present embodiment) of game balls than the predetermined number of game balls when entering the game ball, It leads to a path that is disadvantageous for the player.

  According to this, the electric accessory 37a is provided with an advantageous holding position that guides the player to a path that is advantageous for the player when the remaining game balls are released by the electric accessory drive 37b, and the electric accessory drive 37b. And a disadvantageous holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous holding position when releasing the remaining game balls. Therefore, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball with the electric accessory drive unit 37b, so that the pachinko machine 10 has the player's attention to the game. Can be improved.

Further, the advantageous side holding position leads to a path that is advantageous to the player by entering the general winning opening 35D for paying out a predetermined number of game balls when entering the game ball, and the disadvantageous side holding position When the ball enters the ball into the special winning opening 38a which pays out a smaller number of game balls than the predetermined number of game balls, the ball is guided to a path disadvantageous to the player. When the remaining game balls are released by the unit 37b, the position of the game balls is further focused on.
In other words, when the electric accessory 37a releases the remaining game balls in the electric accessory drive unit 37b, the advantageous holding position that leads to a path for entering the general winning opening 35D different from the large winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 inserts the game ball at the advantageous holding position out of the remaining game balls held by the electric accessory 37a into the general winning opening 35D different from the large winning opening 38a. The game balls can be thrown out, and more game balls than a predetermined number can be paid out when the game balls enter. Therefore, when releasing the remaining game balls with the electric accessory drive unit 37b, the player pays more attention to the position of the game balls.

  In the present embodiment, the advantageous side holding position guides the player to a path that is advantageous to the player by entering the general winning opening 35D for paying out a predetermined number of game balls when entering the game ball. The holding position leads to a path that is disadvantageous for the player by causing the player to enter the large winning opening 38a that pays out a smaller number of game balls than a predetermined number of game balls when entering the game balls. In other words, the advantageous side holding position and the disadvantage side holding position create a path that is advantageous to the player and a path that is disadvantageous for the player by making the number of game balls paid out different.

  On the other hand, for example, the advantageous side holding position may be guided to a path that is advantageous for the player by entering the V winning opening that triggers the shift to the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters. . In short, the advantageous side holding position may be any position that can guide the player to a path that is advantageous for the player when the remaining game balls are released by the guide piece driving unit, and the disadvantageous side holding position is the guide piece. When the drive unit releases the remaining game balls, any position may be used as long as the position can guide the player to a path disadvantageous to the player.

According to this embodiment, substantially the same operation and effect as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and the following operation and effect can be obtained.
(15) In the case of releasing the remaining game balls with the electric accessory driving unit 37b, the electric accessory 37a is driven by the advantageous holding position that leads to a path that is advantageous for the player, and the electric accessory driving unit 37b. A disadvantageous holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous holding position when releasing the remaining game balls. Therefore, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball with the electric accessory drive unit 37b, and the pachinko machine 10 sets the degree of attention of the player to the game. Can be improved.
(16) The advantageous-side holding position leads to a path that is advantageous to the player by entering the general winning opening 35D for paying out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball enters, and the disadvantageous-side holding position is By entering a large winning opening 38a that pays out a smaller number of game balls than a predetermined number of game balls when entering a game ball, the game ball is guided to a path disadvantageous to the player. When the remaining game balls are released by the drive unit 37b, attention is further paid to the position of the game balls.

(17) In the case of releasing the remaining game balls by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, the electric accessory 37a sets the advantageous holding position that leads to a path for entering the general winning opening 35D different from the special winning opening 38a. Since the pachinko machine 10 has the pachinko machine 10, among the remaining game balls held by the electric accessory 37a, the game ball at the advantageous side holding position enters the general winning opening 35D different from the large winning opening 38a. When the game balls enter, more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Therefore, when releasing the remaining game balls with the electric accessory drive unit 37b, the player pays more attention to the position of the game balls.

[Modification of each embodiment]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and modifications, improvements, etc. within a scope that can achieve the object of the present invention are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the special winning opening 38a once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the large winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then a predetermined upper limit continuation time (upper limit continuation period) elapses, or a game to the special winning opening 38a. When the total winning number of balls reaches the predetermined upper limit number, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the open / close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state, the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is a predetermined upper limit number. As a result, the door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to an arbitrary number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number differently according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the number of the pachinko machines 10 may be set differently for each round in one open / close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the door 38b by setting the open / close door 38b to an open state and then reaching the predetermined upper limit number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a. The door 38b has been set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger for setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state in response to the entry of a game ball, and the predetermined time elapses. It may be configured to allow a ball to enter the opportunity.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state and then closes the open / close door 38b again when a predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration) elapses. Had been set to. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 38b by elapse of a predetermined time from the time when the winning in the special winning opening 38a occurs. The closed state may be set again.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state and then sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the door 38b to the closed state again after setting the door 38b to the open state.
(7) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit duration time of the short-time mode is set shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration time of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and equal to or less than n times (n = 1, 2, 3) or less of the firing cycle of the game ball. The time may be set.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is executed twice in the short-time mode upper limit duration time and an opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times in the long-time mode upper limit duration time. Had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening / closing execution mode different from the above with respect to the mode of the upper limit continuation time and the number of round game executions. Further, the pachinko machine 10 changes the degree of opening of the opening / closing door 38b such as half-opening or full-opening, instead of the configuration in which a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes are set by changing the mode of the upper limit duration. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes are set. Further, the mode of the upper limit duration may be set to be different from the correct upper limit duration, although the player looks the same mode to the player.

(9) In the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, and may be selected by lottery from the plurality of types of effects. And the selection rate may be made different depending on the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the game result is one of the “special out-of-special result” and the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 92 stops and displays the final stop on the activated line L. As a result, information relating to a special symbol combination is determined, and the special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of the game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine information relating to the stop result, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which game result.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot occurrence lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot occurs. On the other hand, when the big hit occurs, the MPU 62 may use the big hit random number counter C1 for the lottery of the big hit type. In this case, the big hit type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of outcomes, a "special outcome" and a "normal outcome", and the MPU 62 stores the value of a random number that wins a jackpot. By comparing the winning / failure table with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the lottery of the jackpot has been executed. In other words, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery relating to the “special loss result”. On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses the new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to execute the lottery relating to the “special disconnection result”. May be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the gaming state in which the winning / losing table for the low-probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery of the jackpot occurrence, the number of the random number that becomes the “special outlier” is two. In the gaming state in which the winning / rejecting table for the high-probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that are “special out-of-specification result” is 551. In other words, the probability of the “special outlier result” is set to be higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of “special outlier” may be set to be lower in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, and may be set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may be. Further, the probability of “special outlier” may be set to be 0 in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous for the player by setting the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the state, a game state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game state may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by making the number of times of the game in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the end of the opening / closing execution mode different. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous gaming state depending on whether to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a game state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game state by making the number of times of the game in which the high probability mode is continued after the end of the open / close execution mode different. .

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the hold information on the central operating port 36 in the first result display section holding area Ra, and stores the hold information on the right operating port 37 in the second result display section. By storing the information in the storage area Rb, the hold information on the central operation port 36 and the hold information on the right operation port 37 are separately stored. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the suspension information on the central operation port 36 and the suspension information on the right operation port 37 together.
(16) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the hold information on the right operating port 37 for the use of the game times regardless of whether or not there is the hold information on the central operating port 36. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the hold information related to the central operating port 36 and the hold information related to the right operating port 37 for the use of the game times in the order of winning of the respective hold information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the audio light emission control device 90, and the audio light emission control device 90 transmits a command resulting from analyzing the command to the display control device 100. Thus, the control of the display control device 100 was executed. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the voice light emission control device 90, thereby controlling the voice light emission control device 90. The control of the device 90 may be executed. Note that the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the audio light emission control device 90 and the command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is mainly controlled. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on winning in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbols in this manner, the effect for the game round is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect for the game round is not limited to the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for playing a game by operating a movable decoration member provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 in combination. In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for playing a game by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 in combination. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for playing a game by operating the decorative member and the light emitting unit in combination with the symbol display device 47.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win / fail lottery and distribution lottery) based on winning in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37, and thereafter, the main display unit 45. The symbol display device 47 executes the variable display and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37 as a stop result of the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after starting the variable display. May be displayed. In this case, after starting the variable display and before stopping the variable display, the internal lottery may be executed and the setting of the stop result or the like may be executed.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the pattern and displays the result of the internal lottery as a stop result of the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result regardless of the result of the internal lottery as the stop result of the variable display. The result of the lottery may not be identified. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may not include the main display unit 45.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on winning in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbols in this manner, the effect for the game round is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute an effect for playing a game on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (picture) that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery.

  For example, the symbol display device 47 sets a predetermined area to at least one of an area smaller than the area displaying the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area displaying the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When setting and stopping the variable display of the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, a symbol that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols displayed in the predetermined area may be displayed in a variable manner or not displayed during the variable display of the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  Here, the symbols displayed in the predetermined area may be characters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to identify, or may be combinations thereof. Further, even if it is not a character, a color, or a pattern that is difficult for the player to identify, a pattern that is similar to each other or a combination thereof may be adopted to make it difficult for the player to identify. According to this, the administrator of the amusement arcade, for example, does not look at the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round, but looks at the symbol display device 47 in the same manner as in the case of winning the lottery of the jackpot occurrence. Can be easily confirmed whether or not an illegal act for causing the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above operation is performed.

(23) In the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate independently, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a game machine is configured so that a player can output an optical code by operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and information of the optical code is provided on a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The gaming machine may be configured so that the information of the gaming machine can be transmitted to the web server by imaging and reading the information and accessing the website. Also, the gaming machine is configured so that the password issued by the player accessing the website is input to the gaming machine by operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine, so that the information of the web server can be received. May be.

(24) In the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been described as an example of the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10, for example, the gaming machine of the present invention, when a game ball enters a specific area, A pachinko machine that opens the electric accessory only a predetermined number of times or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of gaming machine such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball.

[Inventive groups extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described. In addition, among the features of the present invention group, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above embodiments, and the features of the present invention group Modifications, improvements, and the like, as long as the object can be achieved, and combinations of the features are included in the features of the present invention.

<Characteristic A group>
Feature A1.
A launching means (firing handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the lottery means (right operating port 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means, a specific control state (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player is set. A game provided with a game state transition means (main control device 60) for transitioning the game state, and a variable prize device (variable prize device 38) for transitioning to a state in which game balls can enter when transitioning to the specific control state. Machine (Pachinko machine 10)
The lottery means,
A guide piece (electrically driven) that can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and has an open state in which the lottery means enters the ball and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter the lottery means. Accessories 37a, 37a3, an upper electric accessory 37a1, and a lower electric accessory 37a2);
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b, upper electrical accessory drive unit 37b1, and lower electrical accessory drive unit 37b2) that sets the open or closed state by driving the guide pieces. ,
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (a special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering the game ball,
A flow path of the game ball passing through the guide piece, having an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area enters the large winning opening, and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter. An opening / closing door (opening / closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable prize driving unit (variable prize driving unit 38c) that sets the door to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to an open state, and then sets the guide piece to a closed state based on at least one game ball entering the lottery means, thereby setting the guide piece to a closed state. Release the remaining game balls held by
The variable winning drive unit,
A gaming machine, wherein the opening and closing door is set to an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening.

  According to the feature A1 of the present invention, the guide piece driving section sets the guide piece to the open state, and then sets the guide piece to the closed state based on at least one game ball entering the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released, and the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to open so that the game balls released from the guide pieces enter the large winning opening. I do. In other words, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. According to this, the gaming machine can cause the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the special winning opening, and can pay out predetermined game balls when the game balls enter the game ball. . Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is located vertically below the guide piece.

  According to the feature A2 of the present invention, since the opening / closing door is located vertically below the guide piece, the game piece released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. Will fall free and head towards the door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the remaining gaming balls held by the guide pieces to enter the large winning opening.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 or the feature A2 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
After setting the open / close door to the open state, the open / close door is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The game wherein the guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

  According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state, and then sets the open / close door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening. The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. In this way, more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be made to enter, and it is possible to make it easy to make an over-prize. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features A1 to A3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
A first opening timing for setting the open / close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening;
A second opening timing that sets the open / close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece does not enter the big winning opening,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is set to an open state at any one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

  According to the feature A4 of the group of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a first opening timing for setting the opening / closing door to be in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening, and a special winning opening. The open / close door is set to the open state at any time of the second opening time in which the open / close door is set to the open state so as not to enter the ball. You will pay attention to whether or not you enter the mouth. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features A1 to A4 of the present invention,
The guide piece,
A first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece;
The guide piece driving units (the upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving unit 37b2)
After the first guide piece is set to the open state, the first guide piece is set to the closed state based on entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, whereby the first A first opening / closing state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces,
After the second guide piece is set to the open state, the second guide piece is set to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, whereby the second guide piece is closed. A second opening and closing state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is set to one of the first open / close state and the second open / close state.

  According to the feature A5 of the group of the present invention, the gaming machine has a first opening / closing state of opening / closing a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of gaming balls flowing down the gaming area, and a plurality of flowing down the gaming area. The second open / close state is set as one of the second open / close states of opening / closing a second guide piece that can hold game balls and can hold more game balls than the first guide piece. By setting the state, it is possible to allow a larger number of game balls to enter the special winning opening than in the case of setting the first open / close state. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, so that the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features A1 to A5 of the present invention,
Holding means for holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means,
A holding main body (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
A holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets the holding state or the non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit includes:
By setting the holding body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding body to the non-holding state, it does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. A game machine characterized by releasing a game ball held by the holding main body in this manner.

  According to the feature A6 of the present invention, the holding main body is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding drive unit holds the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding body to the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding body to the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features A1 to A6 of the present invention,
A gaming machine, comprising: a closed-state effect executing means (closed-state effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to a closed state.

  According to the feature A7 of the present invention, the gaming machine is provided with the closed-state effect performing means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. After the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, the player can be notified by executing a predetermined effect as to whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features A1 to A7 of the present invention group,
The guide piece,
When releasing the remaining game balls by the guide piece driving unit, an advantageous holding position (left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player;
A disadvantageous holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous holding position when releasing the remaining game balls by the guide piece driving unit; A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A8 of the present invention, the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to the open state, and then sets the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. This releases the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces. Further, when releasing the remaining game balls by the guide piece drive unit, the guide piece releases the remaining game balls by the guide side drive unit and the advantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player. In some cases, there is a disadvantageous holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous holding position. Therefore, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball with the guide piece driving unit, and the gaming machine improves the player's attention to the game. be able to.

  According to such a feature group A of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problem can be solved.

  Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of a game board is provided, and when the game ball enters a working opening (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine to execute is known. When the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, for example, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, for example, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, since the variable prize device pays out predetermined game balls when entering the game balls flowing down the game area, the payout of the game balls becomes monotonous, and thus the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (firing handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. It is advantageous for the player based on the starting ball entry means to be executed (the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37) and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball inputting means. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for transitioning the game state to a specific control state (opening / closing execution mode), and a variable prize device (game controller) for transitioning to a state in which game balls can enter when transitioning to the specific control state ( A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a variable winning device 38),
A plurality of game balls that flow down the game area can be held, and a ball entry assisting unit that assists entry of game balls into the variable winning device,
The ball entry assisting means,
An auxiliary main body (motor-operated members 37a, 37a3 and an upper motor-operated member 37a1) located upstream of a flow path of a game ball entering the variable winning device;
An auxiliary driving unit (an electric accessory driving unit 37b and an upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1) that sets the holding state or the non-holding state by driving the auxiliary main body;
The auxiliary drive unit includes:
By setting the auxiliary main body in the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the auxiliary main body in the non-holding state, it does not interfere with game balls flowing down the game area. In this way, the game ball held by the auxiliary main body is released,
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (a special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering the game ball,
An open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the large winning opening, and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter, the flow of game balls passing through the auxiliary main body. An opening / closing door (opening / closing door 38b) located downstream of the road;
A variable prize driving unit (variable prize driving unit 38c) that sets the door to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door,
The variable winning drive unit, after setting the open / close door to an open state, sets the open / close door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
The auxiliary body portion is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary body portion is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B1 of the present invention, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state and then sets the open / close door to the closed state based on a predetermined number of game balls entering the special winning opening. Since the auxiliary main unit can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main unit is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, the gaming machine is large. A larger number of game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be made to enter the winning opening, and it is possible to make it easy to make an over-prize. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to an open state so that a game ball released from the auxiliary main unit enters the large winning opening.

  According to the feature B2 of the present invention, the variable prize driving unit sets the opening and closing door to the open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main body unit enters the large winning opening. A larger number of game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be made to enter the winning opening, and it is possible to make it easy to make an over-prize.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 or the feature B2 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is located vertically below the auxiliary body.

  According to the feature B3 of the present invention, since the opening / closing door is located vertically below the auxiliary body, the auxiliary drive is released from the auxiliary body by setting the auxiliary body to the non-holding state by the auxiliary drive unit. The game ball falls freely and heads toward the door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the gaming balls held in the auxiliary main body to enter the large winning opening.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3 of the present invention,
The variable winning drive unit,
A first opening timing that sets the open / close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main body enters the special winning opening;
A second opening timing that sets the opening and closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main body does not enter the big winning opening,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is set to an open state at any one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

  According to the feature B4 of the present invention, the gaming machine includes: a first opening timing in which the opening and closing door is set to the open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main body enters the special winning opening; Since the opening / closing door is set to the open state at any time of the second opening time in which the opening / closing door is set to the open state so that the ball does not enter the mouth, the game ball released from the auxiliary main body portion is set by the player. Attention will be paid to whether or not to enter the special winning opening. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features B1 to B4 of the present invention group,
The auxiliary body portion,
A first auxiliary main body (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second auxiliary main body (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first auxiliary main body;
The auxiliary drive units (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2)
After the first auxiliary main body is set to the open state, the first auxiliary main body is set to the closed state to release the game ball held by the first auxiliary main body. 1 auxiliary opening and closing state,
After the second auxiliary main body is set to the open state, the second auxiliary main body is set to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the second auxiliary main body. With two auxiliary opening and closing states,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is set to one of the first auxiliary opening / closing state and the second auxiliary opening / closing state.

  According to the feature B5 of the present invention, the gaming machine flows down the gaming area, in the first auxiliary opening / closing state of opening and closing the first auxiliary main body capable of holding a plurality of gaming balls flowing down the gaming area. Since a plurality of game balls can be held, and a second auxiliary body portion that can hold more game balls than the first auxiliary body portion is set to any one of a second auxiliary opening and closing state for opening and closing. By setting the second auxiliary opening / closing state, a larger number of game balls can enter the large winning opening than in the case of setting the first auxiliary opening / closing state. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the second auxiliary main body is opened / closed, so that the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B5 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine comprising a closed-state effect executing means (closed-state effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the auxiliary driving unit sets the auxiliary main body to a non-holding state. .

  According to the feature B6 of the present invention, the gaming machine includes the closed-state effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the auxiliary driving unit sets the auxiliary main body to the non-holding state. After the auxiliary main body is set to the non-holding state by the auxiliary driving unit, it is possible to notify the player by executing a predetermined effect to determine whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player. it can. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B6 of the present invention,
The auxiliary body portion,
When releasing the game ball by the auxiliary drive unit, an advantageous holding position (left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player;
A disadvantageous holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that guides the player to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous holding position when releasing the game ball by the auxiliary driving unit. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature B7 of the present invention, the auxiliary driving unit sets the auxiliary main body to the holding state, and then sets the auxiliary main body to the non-holding state, thereby holding the game ball held by the auxiliary main body. To release. In addition, the auxiliary body portion has an advantageous side holding position that guides the player to a path that is advantageous to the player when releasing the game ball with the auxiliary drive portion, and the advantageous side holding position when releasing the game ball with the auxiliary drive portion. A disadvantageous holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous for the player than the holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball with the auxiliary drive unit, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, so that the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game. .

  According to such a feature B group of the present invention, since the player's attention to the game can be improved, the following problem can be solved.

  Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of a game board is provided, and when the game ball enters a working opening (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine to execute is known. When the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, for example, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, for example, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, since the variable prize device pays out predetermined game balls when entering the game balls flowing down the game area, the payout of the game balls becomes monotonous, and thus the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1.
A launching means (firing handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the lottery means (right operating port 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means, a specific control state (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player is set. A game provided with a game state transition means (main control device 60) for transitioning the game state, and a variable prize device (variable prize device 38) for transitioning to a state in which game balls can enter when transitioning to the specific control state. Machine (Pachinko machine 10)
The lottery means,
A guide piece (electrically driven) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and having an open state in which the lottery means enters the ball and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter the lottery means. Role 37a),
A guide piece drive section (electrically driven accessory drive section 37b) for setting the open or closed state by driving the guide piece;
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (a special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering the game ball,
A flow path of the game ball passing through the guide piece, having an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area enters the large winning opening, and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter. An opening / closing door (opening / closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable prize driving unit (variable prize driving unit 38c) that sets the door to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door,
The guide piece drive unit, after setting the guide piece to the open state, by setting the guide piece to the closed state, to release the game ball held by the guide piece,
The gaming machine is
Period adjusting means for adjusting a relay period from when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to the closed state to when the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state (the small hit in step S907A). Gaming machine for setting a standby time for starting).

  According to the feature C1 of the present invention, the guide piece driving section releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the open state and then setting the guide piece to the closed state. Since the gaming machine is provided with the period adjusting means for adjusting the relay period from setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit to setting the open / close door to the open state by the variable winning drive unit. The relay period can be adjusted by the period adjusting means so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening. According to this, the player pays attention to the relay period from when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to the closed state to when the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
A first opening timing for setting the open / close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening;
A second opening timing that sets the open / close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece does not enter the big winning opening,
The gaming machine, wherein the period adjusting means adjusts the relay period by setting the open / close door to an open state at any one of the first opening time and the second opening time. .

  According to the feature C2 of the present invention, the period adjusting means includes: a first opening timing for setting the opening / closing door to be in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening; Since the opening / closing door is set to the open state at any time of the second opening time when the opening / closing door is set to the open state so that the ball does not enter the mouth, the game ball released from the guide piece is large. You will pay attention to whether or not you enter the winning opening. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 or the feature C2 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is located vertically below the guide piece.

  According to the feature C3 of the present invention, since the opening / closing door is located vertically below the guide piece, the game piece released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. Will fall free and head towards the door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the remaining gaming balls held by the guide pieces to enter the large winning opening.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
After setting the open / close door to the open state, the open / close door is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The game wherein the guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

  According to the feature C4 of the present invention, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state and then sets the open / close door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening. The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. In this way, more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be made to enter, and it is possible to make it easy to make an over-prize. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features C1 to C4 of the present invention group,
Holding means for holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means,
A holding main body (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
A holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets the holding state or the non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit includes:
By setting the holding body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding body to the non-holding state, it does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. A game machine characterized by releasing a game ball held by the holding main body in this manner.

  According to the feature C5 of the present invention, the holding main body is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding drive unit holds the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding body to the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding body to the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features C1 to C5 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine, comprising: a closed-state effect executing means (closed-state effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to a closed state.

  According to the feature C6 of the present invention, the gaming machine is provided with the closed-state effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. After the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, the player can be notified by executing a predetermined effect as to whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The guide piece,
When releasing the game ball by the guide piece drive unit, an advantageous holding position (left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player;
A disadvantageous holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that guides the player to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous holding position when the guide ball drive unit releases the game ball; A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature C7 of the present invention, the guide piece driving unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the open state and then setting the guide piece to the closed state. . In addition, the guide piece has an advantageous holding position that guides the player to a path that is advantageous to the player when releasing the game ball with the guide piece drive unit, and is advantageous when releasing the game ball with the guide piece drive unit. And a disadvantageous holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous for the player than the side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball with the guide piece driving unit, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, and the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game. it can.

  According to such a feature group C of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problem can be solved.

  Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of a game board is provided, and when the game ball enters a working opening (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine to execute is known. When the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, for example, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, for example, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, since the variable prize device pays out predetermined game balls when entering the game balls flowing down the game area, the payout of the game balls becomes monotonous, and thus the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (firing handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the lottery means (right operating port 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means, a specific control state (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player is set. A game provided with a game state transition means (main control device 60) for transitioning the game state, and a variable prize device (variable prize device 38) for transitioning to a state in which game balls can enter when transitioning to the specific control state. Machine (Pachinko machine 10)
The lottery means,
A guide piece (upper side) that can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and has an open state in which the lottery means enters the ball and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter the lottery means. An electric accessory 37a1 and a lower electric accessory 37a2);
A guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) that sets the open or closed state by driving the guide piece;
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (a special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering the game ball,
A flow path of the game ball passing through the guide piece, having an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area enters the large winning opening, and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter. An opening / closing door (opening / closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable prize driving unit (variable prize driving unit 38c) that sets the door to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door,
The guide piece drive unit, after setting the guide piece to the open state, by setting the guide piece to the closed state, to release the game ball held by the guide piece,
The gaming machine is
A gaming machine comprising: a holding amount adjusting means for adjusting an amount by which the guide piece holds a game ball (processing for supporting an electric activity in step S306B).

  According to the feature D1 of the present invention, the guide piece drive unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the open state and then setting the guide piece to the closed state. Since the gaming machine is provided with a holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of holding the game balls, by adjusting the holding amount adjusting means to increase the amount of holding the gaming balls, It is possible to make it easier for game balls to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
A guide piece lottery means (step S1301) for executing a lottery to determine whether or not to set the guide piece to an open state;
The holding amount adjusting means,
A gaming machine characterized in that an amount by which the guide piece holds a game ball is adjusted based on a lottery result of the guide piece lottery means.

  According to the feature D2 of the present invention, the holding amount adjusting means adjusts the amount of holding the game ball by the guide piece based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means. Note the lottery results. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 or the feature D2 of the present invention group,
The guide piece,
A first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece;
The guide piece driving units (the upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving unit 37b2)
After the first guide piece is set to the open state, the first guide piece is set to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the first guide piece. State and
After the second guide piece is set to the open state, the second guide piece is set to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the second guide piece. State and
The gaming machine, wherein the holding amount adjusting means sets one of the first opening / closing state and the second opening / closing state.

  According to the feature D3 of the group of the present invention, the holding amount adjustment unit is configured to open and close a first guide piece that can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and to flow down the game area. Since it is set to one of the second open / close states in which a plurality of game balls can be held and a second guide piece capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece is opened and closed, the second state is set. By setting the open / closed state, a larger number of game balls can be made to enter the special winning opening as compared with the case of setting the first open / closed state. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, so that the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features D1 to D3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
A gaming machine, wherein the opening and closing door is set to an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening.

  According to the feature D4 of the group of the present invention, the variable prize driving unit sets the open / close door to be in the open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the large prize winning opening. Gaming balls can be reliably inserted into the mouth.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is located vertically below the guide piece.

  According to the feature D5 of the present invention, since the opening / closing door is located vertically below the guide piece, the game piece released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. Will fall free and head towards the door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the remaining gaming balls held by the guide pieces to enter the large winning opening.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D5 of the present invention,
The variable winning drive unit,
After setting the open / close door to the open state, the open / close door is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The game wherein the guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

  According to the feature D6 of the present invention, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state, and then sets the open / close door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening. The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. In this way, more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be made to enter, and it is possible to make it easy to make an over-prize. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features D1 to D6 of the present invention,
The variable winning drive unit,
A first opening timing for setting the open / close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening;
A second opening timing that sets the open / close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece does not enter the big winning opening,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is set to an open state at any one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

  According to the feature D7 of the present invention, the gaming machine includes: a first opening timing for setting the opening / closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the large winning opening; The open / close door is set to the open state at any time of the second opening time in which the open / close door is set to the open state so as not to enter the ball. You will pay attention to whether or not you enter the mouth. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features D1 to D7 of the present invention group,
Holding means for holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means,
A holding main body (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
A holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets the holding state or the non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit includes:
By setting the holding body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding body to the non-holding state, it does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. A game machine characterized by releasing a game ball held by the holding main body in this manner.

  According to the feature D8 of the present invention group, the holding main body is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding drive unit holds the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding body to the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding body to the non-holding state. The game balls held by the holding body can be released without interfering with the game balls. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features D1 to D8 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine, comprising: a closed-state effect executing means (closed-state effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to a closed state.

  According to the feature D9 of the present invention, the gaming machine includes the closed-state effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. After the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, the player can be notified by executing a predetermined effect as to whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D10.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features D1 to D9 of the present invention,
The guide piece,
When releasing the game ball by the guide piece drive unit, an advantageous holding position (left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player;
A disadvantageous holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that guides the player to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous holding position when the guide ball drive unit releases the game ball; A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature D10 of the present invention, the guide piece drive unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the open state and then setting the guide piece to the closed state. . In addition, the guide piece has an advantageous holding position that guides the player to a path that is advantageous to the player when releasing the game ball with the guide piece drive unit, and is advantageous when releasing the game ball with the guide piece drive unit. And a disadvantageous holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous for the player than the side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball with the guide piece driving unit, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, and the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game. it can.

  According to such a feature D group of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problem can be solved.

  Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of a game board is provided, and when the game ball enters a working opening (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine to execute is known. When the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, for example, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, for example, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, since the variable prize device pays out predetermined game balls when entering the game balls flowing down the game area, the payout of the game balls becomes monotonous, and thus the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1.
A launching means (firing handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. It is advantageous for the player based on the starting ball entry means to be executed (the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37) and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball inputting means. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for transitioning the game state to a specific control state (opening / closing execution mode), and a variable prize device (game controller) for transitioning to a state in which game balls can enter when transitioning to the specific control state ( A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a variable winning device 38),
Holding means for holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means,
Holding body (plate 50),
A holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets the holding state or the non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit includes:
By setting the holding body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding body to the non-holding state, it does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. In this way, the game ball held by the holding body is released,
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (a special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering the game ball,
An open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the large winning opening, and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter, the flow of game balls passing through the holding main body. An opening / closing door (opening / closing door 38b) located downstream of the road;
A gaming machine, comprising: a variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door.

  According to the feature E1 of the present invention, the opening / closing door of the variable winning device is located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the holding main body. The holding drive unit holds the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding body to the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding body to the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can make it easier for a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area to enter the special winning opening.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the holding drive section is configured to drive the holding body section to repeat a holding state and a non-holding state so as to make a simple vibration.

  According to the feature E2 of the group of the present invention, the holding drive section is set so as to vibrate in a simple manner by repeating the holding state and the non-holding state by driving the holding body section. Can be simplified.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 or the feature E2 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is located vertically below the holding main body.

  According to the feature E3 of the present invention, since the opening / closing door is located vertically below the holding body, the holding drive unit sets the holding body to the non-holding state, so that the door is released from the holding body. The game ball falls freely and heads toward the door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the gaming ball held by the holding body to enter the large winning opening.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features E1 to E3 of the present invention,
The variable winning drive unit,
After setting the open / close door to the open state, the open / close door is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The holding body portion is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the holding body portion is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Gaming machine to do.

  According to the feature E4 of the present invention, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state, and then sets the open / close door to the closed state based on a predetermined number of game balls entering the special winning opening. Since the holding main body can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the holding main body is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, the gaming machine has a large size. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can easily enter the winning opening, and over winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

  According to such a feature E group of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the following problem can be solved.

  Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of a game board is provided, and when the game ball enters a working opening (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine to execute is known. When the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, for example, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, for example, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, since the variable prize device pays out predetermined game balls when entering the game balls flowing down the game area, the payout of the game balls becomes monotonous, and thus the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

<Characteristic F group>
Feature F1.
A launching means (firing handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with lottery means (right operating port 37) for executing,
The lottery means,
A guide piece (an electric accessory) that is capable of holding game balls flowing down the game area and has an open state in which the lottery means enters the ball and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter the lottery means. 37a, 37a3, an upper electric accessory 37a1, and a lower electric accessory 37a2);
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b, upper electrical accessory drive unit 37b1, and lower electrical accessory drive unit 37b2) that sets the open or closed state by driving the guide pieces. ,
The gaming machine includes a closed-state effect execution unit (a closed-state effect determination process in step S2117A) that executes a predetermined effect when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to a closed state. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature F1 of the present invention, the gaming machine is provided with the closed-state effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide-piece driving unit. After the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, the player can be notified by executing a predetermined effect as to whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 of the present invention group,
The closing-time effect execution means sets the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, and when the player piece is in an advantageous state, sets the guide piece in an advantageous state for the player. In the case where it is disadvantageous for the player by executing the advantageous state notification effect (high expectation effect effect) and setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, A gaming machine characterized by executing a disadvantageous state notification effect (low expectation degree effect) for notifying a player of an adverse state.

  According to the feature F2 of the group of the present invention, the at-closure effect execution means is advantageous for the player when the guide piece is set in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, so as to be in an advantageous state for the player. By performing an advantageous state notification effect of notifying the player of the state, and setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, when the state becomes disadvantageous for the player, Since the disadvantageous state notification effect of notifying the player that the game is going to be performed is executed, the player pays attention to the predetermined effect executed by the closing effect execution unit.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F2 of the present invention group,
Game state transition means (main control) for transitioning the game state to a specific control state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means. Device 60);
A variable prize device (variable prize device 38) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when the control state is shifted to the specific control state,
The guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (a special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering the game ball,
A flow path of the game ball passing through the guide piece, having an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area enters the large winning opening, and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter. An opening / closing door (opening / closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable prize driving unit (variable prize driving unit 38c) that sets the door to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to an open state, and then sets the guide piece to a closed state based on at least one game ball entering the lottery means, thereby setting the guide piece to a closed state. Release the remaining game balls held by
The variable winning drive unit,
The opening and closing door is set to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening,
By setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, the closing-time effect execution means is used when the expectation that more game balls than a predetermined number will be inserted into the special winning opening is high. By executing the advantageous state notification effect and setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, when the expectation of allowing more game balls than the predetermined number to enter the large winning opening is low. A gaming machine characterized by executing a disadvantageous state notification effect.

  According to the feature F3 of the present invention, the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to the open state, and then sets the guide piece to the closed state based on at least one game ball entering the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released, and the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to open so that the game balls released from the guide pieces enter the large winning opening. I do. In other words, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. According to this, the gaming machine can cause the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the special winning opening, and can pay out predetermined game balls when the game balls enter the game ball. . Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

  Further, the closed-state effect execution means sets the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, thereby providing an advantageous state when the degree of expectation that more game balls than a predetermined number will enter the special winning opening is high. By performing the notification effect and setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, the disadvantageous state notification effect is provided when the degree of expectation to allow more game balls than the predetermined number to enter the large winning opening is low. Since the execution is performed, the player pays attention to the predetermined effect executed by the closing effect executing means.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is located vertically below the guide piece.

  According to the feature F4 of the present invention, since the opening / closing door is located vertically below the guide piece, the game piece released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. Will fall free and head towards the door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the remaining gaming balls held by the guide pieces to enter the large winning opening.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
After setting the open / close door to the open state, the open / close door is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The game wherein the guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

  According to the feature F5 of the present invention, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state, and then sets the open / close door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening. The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. In this way, more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be made to enter, and it is possible to make it easy to make an over-prize. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F3 to F5 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
A first opening timing for setting the open / close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening;
A second opening timing that sets the open / close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece does not enter the big winning opening,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is set to an open state at any one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

  According to the feature F6 of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a first opening timing for setting the opening / closing door to be in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the large winning opening, and a large winning opening. The open / close door is set to the open state at any time of the second opening time in which the open / close door is set to the open state so that the ball does not enter the game ball. You will pay attention to whether or not you enter the mouth. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F3 to F6 of the present invention,
The guide piece,
A first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece;
The guide piece driving units (the upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving unit 37b2)
After the first guide piece is set to the open state, the first guide piece is set to the closed state based on entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, whereby the first A first opening / closing state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces,
After the second guide piece is set to the open state, the second guide piece is set to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, whereby the second guide piece is closed. A second opening and closing state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is set to one of the first open / close state and the second open / close state.

  According to the feature F7 of the present invention, the gaming machine has a first opening / closing state of opening / closing a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of gaming balls flowing down the gaming area, and a plurality of gaming balls flowing down the gaming area. The second open / close state is set as one of the second open / close states of opening / closing a second guide piece that can hold game balls and can hold more game balls than the first guide piece. By setting the state, it is possible to allow a larger number of game balls to enter the special winning opening than in the case of setting the first open / close state. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, so that the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F3 to F7 of the present invention group,
Holding means for holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means,
A holding main body (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
A holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets the holding state or the non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit includes:
By setting the holding body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding body to the non-holding state, it does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. A game machine characterized by releasing a game ball held by the holding main body in this manner.

  According to the feature F8 of the present invention group, the holding main body is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding drive unit holds the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding body to the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding body to the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature F9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F1 to F8 of the present invention group,
The guide piece,
When releasing the game ball by the guide piece drive unit, an advantageous holding position (left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player;
A disadvantageous holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that guides the player to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous holding position when the guide ball drive unit releases the game ball; A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature F9 of the present invention, the guide piece driving unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the open state and then setting the guide piece to the closed state. . In addition, the guide piece has an advantageous holding position that guides the player to a path that is advantageous to the player when releasing the game ball with the guide piece drive unit, and is advantageous when releasing the game ball with the guide piece drive unit. And a disadvantageous holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous for the player than the side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball with the guide piece driving unit, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, and the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game. it can.

  According to such a feature F group of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problem can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of a game board is provided, and when the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine to execute is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, for example, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which gaming balls can enter.
By the way, as one type of such an operation port, an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area can be held and the operation ball can enter the operation port, and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter the operation port. 2. Description of the Related Art There is known an operation port including a guide piece having the guide piece, and a guide piece drive unit that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece.

  However, since the guide piece is monotonically set to the open state or the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic G group>
Feature G1.
A launching means (firing handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with lottery means (right operating port 37) for executing,
The lottery means,
A guide piece (electrically driven) that can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and has an open state in which the lottery means enters the ball and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter the lottery means. Accessories 37a, 37a3, an upper electric accessory 37a1, and a lower electric accessory 37a2);
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b, upper electrical accessory drive unit 37b1, and lower electrical accessory drive unit 37b2) that sets the open or closed state by driving the guide pieces. ,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to an open state, and then sets the guide piece to a closed state based on at least one game ball entering the lottery means, thereby setting the guide piece to a closed state. Release the remaining game balls held by
The guide piece,
When releasing the remaining game balls by the guide piece driving unit, an advantageous holding position (left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player;
A disadvantageous holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous holding position when releasing the remaining game balls by the guide piece driving unit; A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature G1 of the present invention, the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to the open state, and then sets the guide piece to the closed state based on at least one game ball entering the lottery means. This releases the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces. Further, when releasing the remaining game balls by the guide piece drive unit, the guide piece releases the remaining game balls by the guide side drive unit and the advantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player. In some cases, there is a disadvantageous holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous holding position. Therefore, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball with the guide piece driving unit, and the gaming machine improves the player's attention to the game. be able to.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 of the present invention group,
The advantageous-side holding position guides a path that is advantageous to the player by allowing a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out when entering the game ball, thereby leading to a path that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine characterized in that when entering a ball, a smaller number of gaming balls than a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to a winning opening for paying out, thereby leading to a path disadvantageous to the player.

  According to the feature G2 of the group of the present invention, the advantageous side holding position leads to a path that is advantageous to the player by entering a winning hole that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when entering the game ball, thereby causing a disadvantage. The side holding position guides the player to a path that is disadvantageous to the player by entering the winning opening that pays out a smaller number of game balls than the predetermined number of game balls when entering the game ball, so that the player: When releasing the remaining game balls by the guide piece driving unit, the position of the game balls is further focused on.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G2 of the present invention group,
Game state transition means (main control) for transitioning the game state to a specific control state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means. Device 60);
A variable prize device (variable prize device 38) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when the control state is shifted to the specific control state,
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (a special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering the game ball,
A flow path of the game ball passing through the guide piece, having an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area enters the large winning opening, and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter. An opening / closing door (opening / closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable prize driving unit (variable prize driving unit 38c) that sets the door to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door,
The guide piece,
When releasing the remaining game balls in the guide piece drive unit, the disadvantageous side holding position that guides the player to a path for entering the special winning opening,
And when the guide piece driving unit releases the remaining game balls, the advantageous side holding position guides the player to a path to enter a prize port (general prize port 35D) different from the large prize port,
The variable winning drive unit,
A gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is set to an open state so that the gaming ball at the disadvantaged holding position released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening.

  According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state so that the game ball at the disadvantaged holding position released from the guide piece enters the large winning opening. In other words, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. According to this, the gaming machine can allow the game ball at the disadvantaged holding position to enter the large winning opening out of the remaining game balls held by the guide piece, A predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

  In addition, the guide piece has an advantageous side holding position that guides the player to a path to enter a winning port different from the big winning port when the remaining game balls are released by the guide piece driving section. Of the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces, the game balls at the advantageous side holding position can be made to enter a winning opening different from the big winning opening, and a predetermined number More game balls can be paid out. Therefore, when releasing the remaining game balls with the guide piece drive unit, the player will pay more attention to the positions of the game balls.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is located vertically below the guide piece.

  According to the feature G4 of the present invention, since the opening / closing door is located vertically below the guide piece, the game piece released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. Will fall free and head towards the door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the remaining gaming balls held by the guide pieces to enter the large winning opening.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
After setting the open / close door to the open state, the open / close door is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The game wherein the guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

  According to the feature G5 of the present invention, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state and then sets the open / close door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening. The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. In this way, more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be made to enter, and it is possible to make it easy to make an over-prize. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features G3 to G5 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
A first opening timing for setting the open / close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening;
A second opening timing that sets the open / close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece does not enter the big winning opening,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is set to an open state at any one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

  According to the feature G6 of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a first opening timing for setting the opening / closing door to be in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening, and a special winning opening. The open / close door is set to the open state at any time of the second opening time in which the open / close door is set to the open state so that the ball does not enter the game ball. You will pay attention to whether or not you enter the mouth. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features G3 to G6 of the present invention group,
The guide piece,
A first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece;
The guide piece driving units (the upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving unit 37b2)
After the first guide piece is set to the open state, the first guide piece is set to the closed state based on entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, whereby the first A first opening / closing state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces,
After the second guide piece is set to the open state, the second guide piece is set to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, whereby the second guide piece is closed. A second opening and closing state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is set to one of the first open / close state and the second open / close state.

  According to the feature G7 of the present invention, the gaming machine has a first opening / closing state for opening and closing a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and a plurality of pieces flowing down the game area. The second open / close state is set as one of the second open / close states of opening / closing a second guide piece that can hold game balls and can hold more game balls than the first guide piece. By setting the state, it is possible to allow a larger number of game balls to enter the special winning opening than in the case of setting the first open / close state. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, so that the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features G3 to G7 of the present invention,
Holding means for holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means,
A holding main body (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
A holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets the holding state or the non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit includes:
By setting the holding body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding body to the non-holding state, it does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. A game machine characterized by releasing a game ball held by the holding main body in this manner.

  According to the feature G8 of the present invention group, the holding main body is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding drive unit holds the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding body to the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding body to the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature G9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features G1 to G8 of the present invention,
A gaming machine, comprising: a closed-state effect executing means (closed-state effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to a closed state.

  According to the feature G9 of the present invention, the gaming machine is provided with the closed-state effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. After the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, the player can be notified by executing a predetermined effect as to whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

  According to such a feature G group of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problem can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of a game board is provided, and when the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine to execute is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, for example, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which gaming balls can enter.
By the way, as one type of such an operation port, an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area can be held and the operation ball can enter the operation port, and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter the operation port. 2. Description of the Related Art There is known an operation port including a guide piece having the guide piece, and a guide piece drive unit that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece.

  However, since the guide piece is monotonically set to the open state or the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

  As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

  10: Pachinko machine, 35: General winning opening, 36: Upper working opening, 37: Lower working opening, 38: Variable winning device, 38a: Large winning opening, 38b: Opening / closing door, 38c: Variable winning drive, 39 ... Out Mouth, 47 ... Symbol display device, 60 ... Main control device, 62 ... MPU, 90 ... Sound emission control device, 92 ... MPU, 100 ... Display control device, 102 ... MPU.

Claims (5)

Launching means for firing game balls toward a game area formed on the front of the game board; and lottery means for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter and executing an internal lottery when entering the game balls. A game state transition unit that transitions a game state to a specific control state advantageous to a player, based on a result of an internal lottery executed upon entry of a game ball to the lottery unit; A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery means,
A guide piece that can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and has an open state in which the lottery means enters the ball, and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter the lottery means,
By driving the guide piece, comprising a guide piece drive unit to set the open state or closed state,
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening that pays out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball,
A flow path for the game balls passing through the guide pieces, having an open state in which the game balls flowing down the game area enter the large winning opening, and a closed state in which the game balls flowing down the game area do not enter the ball. An opening / closing door located downstream of the
By driving the opening and closing door, comprising a variable winning drive set to open or closed state,
The guide piece drive unit, after setting the guide piece to the open state, by setting the guide piece to the closed state, to release the game ball held by the guide piece,
The gaming machine is
A game machine comprising a holding amount adjusting means for adjusting an amount by which the guide piece holds a game ball. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A guide piece lottery means for performing a lottery of whether to set the guide piece to the open state,
The holding amount adjusting means,
A gaming machine characterized in that an amount by which the guide piece holds a game ball is adjusted based on a lottery result of the guide piece lottery means. In the gaming machine described in claim 1 or claim 2,
The guide piece,
A first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
A second guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece;
The guide piece drive unit,
After the first guide piece is set to the open state, the first guide piece is set to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the first guide piece. State and
After the second guide piece is set to the open state, the second guide piece is set to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the second guide piece. State and
The gaming machine, wherein the holding amount adjusting means sets one of the first opening / closing state and the second opening / closing state. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The variable winning drive unit,
A gaming machine, wherein the opening and closing door is set to an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing door is located vertically below the guide piece.

Images